WO2024031237A1 - 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备 - Google Patents

无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024031237A1
WO2024031237A1 PCT/CN2022/110843 CN2022110843W WO2024031237A1 WO 2024031237 A1 WO2024031237 A1 WO 2024031237A1 CN 2022110843 W CN2022110843 W CN 2022110843W WO 2024031237 A1 WO2024031237 A1 WO 2024031237A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
srs resource
tci
tci state
pusch
indication information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/110843
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
史志华
刘哲
曹建飞
方昀
Original Assignee
Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 filed Critical Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2022/110843 priority Critical patent/WO2024031237A1/zh
Publication of WO2024031237A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024031237A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • Embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a wireless communication method, terminal equipment, and network equipment.
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • TCI Transmission Configuration Indicator
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication method, terminal equipment, and network equipment.
  • a multi-panel PUSCH repeated transmission scenario the association relationship between the SRS resource set and the TCI status is clarified, so that the SRS resource set and its association can be based on TCI status, determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the SRS resource set; or, in the multi-panel PUSCH repeated transmission scenario, clarify the correlation between the SRS resource and the TCI status, so that the SRS resource can be based on The resource and its associated TCI status determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the SRS resource.
  • a wireless communication method applied to terminal equipment, and the method includes:
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a first SRS resource set and a second SRS resource set.
  • the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set are both used for codebook-based or non-codebook-based or non-codebook-based use.
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 TCI states; or, the two TCI states indicated by the first indication information
  • the K1 TCI states are currently activated TCI states corresponding to uplink transmission, and K1 is a positive integer.
  • a wireless communication method applied to network equipment, and the method includes:
  • Send first indication information where the first indication information is used to indicate a first SRS resource set and a second SRS resource set. Both the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set are used for codebook-based or non- PUSCH of the codebook;
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 TCI states; or, the two TCI states indicated by the first indication information
  • the K1 TCI states are currently activated TCI states corresponding to uplink transmission, and K1 is a positive integer.
  • a third aspect provides a terminal device for executing the method in the first aspect.
  • the terminal device includes a functional module for executing the method in the first aspect.
  • a fourth aspect provides a network device for performing the method in the above second aspect.
  • the network device includes a functional module for executing the method in the above second aspect.
  • a terminal device including a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the terminal device executes the above-mentioned first aspect.
  • a network device including a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the network device performs the above-mentioned second aspect. Methods.
  • a seventh aspect provides an apparatus for implementing the method in any one of the above first to second aspects.
  • the device includes: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a device installed with the device executes the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to second aspects.
  • An eighth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program that causes a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to second aspects.
  • a computer program product including computer program instructions, which cause a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to second aspects.
  • a tenth aspect provides a computer program that, when run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to second aspects.
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the TCI state among the K1 TCI states, that is, the first SRS resource is clarified
  • the TCI status associated with the set and/or the second SRS resource set so that the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set can be determined based on the first SRS resource set and its associated TCI status, and /Or, determine an uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the second SRS resource set based on the second SRS resource set and its associated TCI status.
  • some or all of the two SRS resources indicated by the first indication information are associated with TCI states among the K1 TCI states, that is, the relationship between some or all of the two SRS resources and the TCI states is clarified.
  • the association relationship allows the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the SRS resource to be determined based on the SRS resource and its associated TCI status.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system architecture applied in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of a multi-TRP transmission applied in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of multi-beam transmission applied in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of a TCI state configuration method of PDSCH applied in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic interactive flow chart of a wireless communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic block diagram of a network device provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic block diagram of a device provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-A Advanced long term evolution
  • NR New Radio
  • NTN Non-Terrestrial Networks
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WLAN Wireless Local Area Networks
  • WiFi Wireless Fidelity
  • the communication system in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to a carrier aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) scenario, a dual connectivity (Dual Connectivity, DC) scenario, or a standalone (Standalone, SA) scenario. ) network deployment scenario, or applied to Non-Standalone (NSA) network deployment scenario.
  • Carrier Aggregation, CA Carrier Aggregation
  • DC Dual Connectivity
  • SA standalone
  • NSA Non-Standalone
  • the communication system in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to unlicensed spectrum, where the unlicensed spectrum can also be considered as shared spectrum; or, the communication system in the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to licensed spectrum, Among them, licensed spectrum can also be considered as unshared spectrum.
  • the communication system in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the FR1 frequency band (corresponding to the frequency band range 410MHz to 7.125GHz), can also be applied to the FR2 frequency band (corresponding to the frequency band range 24.25GHz to 52.6GHz), and can also be applied to The new frequency band, for example, corresponds to the frequency band range of 52.6 GHz to 71 GHz or the high frequency band corresponding to the frequency band range of 71 GHz to 114.25 GHz.
  • the embodiments of this application describe various embodiments in combination with network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the terminal equipment may also be called user equipment (User Equipment, UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device, etc.
  • User Equipment User Equipment
  • the terminal device can be a station (STATION, ST) in the WLAN, a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (Session Initiation Protocol, SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) station, or a personal digital assistant.
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, next-generation communication systems such as terminal devices in NR networks, or in the future Terminal equipment in the evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) network, etc.
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the terminal device can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld, wearable or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft, balloons and satellites). superior).
  • the terminal device may be a mobile phone (Mobile Phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (Virtual Reality, VR) terminal device, or an augmented reality (Augmented Reality, AR) terminal.
  • Equipment wireless terminal equipment in industrial control, wireless terminal equipment in self-driving, wireless terminal equipment in remote medical, wireless terminal equipment in smart grid , wireless terminal equipment in transportation safety, wireless terminal equipment in smart city (smart city) or wireless terminal equipment in smart home (smart home), vehicle-mounted communication equipment, wireless communication chip/application specific integrated circuit (ASIC)/system on chip (System on Chip, SoC), etc.
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices. It is a general term for applying wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes, etc.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are not just hardware devices, but also achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized devices that can achieve complete or partial functions without relying on smartphones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and those that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to cooperate with other devices such as smartphones.
  • the network device may be a device used to communicate with mobile devices.
  • the network device may be an access point (Access Point, AP) in WLAN, or a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in GSM or CDMA.
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • it can be a base station (NodeB, NB) in WCDMA, or an evolutionary base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in LTE, or a relay station or access point, or a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, and an NR network Network equipment or base station (gNB) or Transmission Reception Point (TRP), or network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network or network equipment in the NTN network, etc.
  • gNB NR network Network equipment or base station
  • TRP Transmission Reception Point
  • the network device may have mobile characteristics, for example, the network device may be a mobile device.
  • network devices may be satellites or balloon stations.
  • the satellite can be a low earth orbit (LEO) satellite, a medium earth orbit (MEO) satellite, a geosynchronous orbit (geostationary earth orbit, GEO) satellite, a high elliptical orbit (High Elliptical Orbit, HEO) satellite ) satellite, etc.
  • the network device may also be a base station installed on land, water, or other locations.
  • network equipment can provide services for a cell, and terminal equipment communicates with the network equipment through transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) used by the cell.
  • the cell can be a network equipment ( For example, the cell corresponding to the base station), the cell can belong to the macro base station, or it can belong to the base station corresponding to the small cell (Small cell).
  • the small cell here can include: urban cell (Metro cell), micro cell (Micro cell), pico cell ( Pico cell), femto cell (Femto cell), etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
  • the communication system 100 may include a network device 110, which may be a device that communicates with a terminal device 120 (also referred to as a communication terminal or terminal).
  • the network device 110 may provide communication coverage for a specific geographical area and may communicate with terminal devices located within the coverage area.
  • Figure 1 exemplarily shows one network device and two terminal devices.
  • the communication system 100 may include multiple network devices and other numbers of terminal devices may be included within the coverage of each network device. The embodiments of the present application do not limit this.
  • the communication system 100 may also include other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, which are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication device may include a network device 110 and a terminal device 120 with communication functions.
  • the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 may be the specific devices described above, which will not be described again here.
  • the communication device may also include other devices in the communication system 100, such as network controllers, mobility management entities and other network entities, which are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the first communication device may be a terminal device, such as a mobile phone, a machine facility, a Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), industrial equipment, a vehicle, etc.; the second communication device The device may be a peer communication device of the first communication device, such as a network device, a mobile phone, an industrial device, a vehicle, etc.
  • the first communication device may be a terminal device, and the second communication device may be a network device (ie, uplink communication or downlink communication); or, the first communication device may be a first terminal, and the second communication device Can be used as a second terminal (i.e. sideline communication).
  • the "instruction” mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a direct instruction, an indirect instruction, or an association relationship.
  • a indicates B which can mean that A directly indicates B, for example, B can be obtained through A; it can also mean that A indirectly indicates B, for example, A indicates C, and B can be obtained through C; it can also mean that there is an association between A and B. relation.
  • correlate can mean that there is a direct correspondence or indirect correspondence between the two, it can also mean that there is an associated relationship between the two, or it can mean indicating and being instructed, configuration and being. Configuration and other relationships.
  • predefinition or “preconfiguration” can be achieved by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices).
  • devices for example, including terminal devices and network devices.
  • predefined can refer to what is defined in the protocol.
  • the "protocol” may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, it may be an evolution of the existing LTE protocol, NR protocol, Wi-Fi protocol or protocols related to other communication systems.
  • the application does not limit the type of agreement.
  • NR systems or 5G systems include large-bandwidth communications in high frequency bands (such as frequency bands above 6GHz). When the operating frequency becomes higher, the path loss during transmission will increase, thus affecting the coverage capability of the high-frequency system.
  • an effective technical solution is to use multiple beams based on massive antenna arrays (such as Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO)). (or hybrid beam) technology to improve coverage capabilities.
  • MIMO Multiple Input Multiple Output
  • a cell uses a wider beam to cover the entire cell. Therefore, at every moment, UEs within the cell coverage have the opportunity to obtain transmission resources allocated by the system.
  • the multi-beam system of the NR system or the 5G system covers the entire cell through different beams, that is, each beam covers a smaller range, and multiple beams cover the entire cell through time scanning (sweeping). Effect.
  • different beams are identified through different signals carried on them.
  • SSB synchronization signal blocks
  • SSB can also be called synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (Synchronization Signal/Physical Broadcast Channel block, SS/PBCH block).
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information Reference Signal
  • the Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) and the Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) can be transmitted through different downlink transmit beams.
  • omnidirectional antennas or nearly omnidirectional antennas are used to receive signals sent by different downlink transmit beams of the base station.
  • corresponding beam indication information (beam indication) is needed to assist the UE in determining the transmit beam-related information on the network side, or the corresponding receive beam-related information on the UE side.
  • the beam indication information does not directly indicate the beam itself, but through the quasi-co-located (QCL) quasi-co-located type (such as QCL Type D (QCL-TypeD)) between signals. instruct.
  • QCL quasi-co-located
  • QCL-TypeD QCL Type D
  • determining to receive the corresponding channel/signal is also based on the QCL quasi-co-location assumption.
  • the QCL quasi-colocation assumption is indicated by the TCI state (TCI-state), that is, the network passes related signaling (Radio Resource Control (RRC), and/or, Media Access Control Layer Control Unit (Media Access Control Control Element, MAC CE), and/or, Downlink Control Information (Downlink Control Information, DCI)) to configure and/or indicate the pair's Transmission Configuration Indicator (TCI) status.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC CE Media Access Control Layer Control Unit
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • TRP multi-transmission reception point
  • panel panel
  • beam beam
  • Multi-TRP Multiple TRP, mTRP or M-TRP transmission refers to that on the same carrier, multiple TRPs can communicate with a terminal at the same time. Since in the NR system, multiple TRP transmissions, or multiple panels or multiple beams can transmit to one terminal at the same time, the same scheme can be used, so in the description, they are often not distinguished (for example, it is called multi-TRP transmission, mTRP transmission, or M-TRP transmission), or expressed as multiple TRP/panel/beam transmissions.
  • Scheme 1 Single-PDCCH based scheme, the UE only detects one PDCCH, and a DCI detected by the control channel PDCCH indicates the relevant indication information of data transmitted simultaneously on multiple TRPs/panel/beams ( From the protocol level, we cannot see multiple TRP/panel/beam. We can only see that one transmission needs to correspond to multiple TCI-states, that is, multiple TCI-states are used to implicitly support multiple TRP/panel/beam transmissions) .
  • Scheme 2 Multiple-PDCCH based scheme, the UE receives different PDCCHs from different TRP/panel/beams, and the DCI detected on each control channel PDCCH indicates a corresponding data transmission correlation.
  • Instruction information (You cannot see multiple TRPs/panels/beams from the protocol level, you can only see the control resource set (Control Resource Set, CORESET) corresponding to the DCI of the scheduling data, which may be associated with different CORESET resource pool numbers (CORESET pool index), which corresponds to different CORESET resource pool numbers (pool index), that is, multiple TRP/panel/beam transmissions are implicitly supported through multiple different CORESET pool indexes).
  • CORESET pool index CORESET resource pool numbers
  • multiple TRP transmissions can be shown in Figure 2
  • multiple beam transmissions can be shown in Figure 3.
  • option 1 the UE only needs to detect one PDCCH, so the control channel detection complexity may be lower than that of option 2.
  • Option 1 requires the ability to quickly exchange information between different panels/TRPs/beams.
  • the UE needs to detect multiple PDCCHs on the same carrier at the same time.
  • the complexity may increase, but the flexibility and robustness may be improved.
  • Possible application scenarios of Option 2 include at least one of the following:
  • TRPs belong to the same cell, and the connection (backhaul) between TRPs is ideal (that is, information exchange can be carried out quickly and dynamic information can be exchanged);
  • TRPs belong to the same cell, and the connection (backhaul) between TRPs is not ideal (that is, TRPs cannot exchange information quickly and can only exchange relatively slow data);
  • TRPs belong to different cells, and the connection (backhaul) between TRPs is ideal;
  • TRPs belong to different cells, and the connection (backhaul) between TRPs is not ideal;
  • Option 1 is generally considered to be only suitable for ideal backhaul scenarios (i.e. S1-1, S1-3).
  • the sounding reference signal (SRS) resources used by PUSCH when transmitted to two TRPs and the precoding matrices used in codebook transmission may be different to match the channel status of different TRPs respectively. Therefore, single DCI scheduling (for DCI Dynamically scheduled PUSCH) supports indicating two SRS resource indicators (SRS resource indicator, SRI)/transmit precoding matrix indicator (Transmit Precoding Matrix Indicator, TPMI) through one DCI, that is, based on two independent SRI domains and two independent TPMI field to indicate the PUSCH corresponding to the 2 TRPs.
  • SRS resource indicator SRI
  • TPMI Transmit Precoding Matrix Indicator
  • CG PUSCH Configured grant
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • Type 1 CG PUSCH Type1 CG PUSCH
  • Type 2 CG PUSCH Type2 CG PUSCH
  • Type 1 CG PUSCH is semi-statically configured by RRC, including time and frequency domain resources, demodulation reference signal (Demodulation Reference Signal, DMRS) , open-loop power control, modulation and coding scheme (Modulation and Coding Scheme, MCS) and other parameters required for PUSCH transmission.
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • Type2 CG PUSCH is configured by RRC with some semi-static parameters including the period of time domain resources, power control, number of repetitions, etc. , activated by DCI and indicating time-frequency resources, DMRS, MCS and other parameters in the same DCI. Both CG PUSCHs have been enhanced based on multiple TRPs in R17.
  • R17 stipulates that a set of P0-PUSCH-Alpha (P0-PUSCH-Alpha) and the used power control loop (powerControlLoopToUse) are added to the CG configuration (ConfiguredGrantConfig) for the power control of the second TRP.
  • Type2 CG PUSCH For Type2 CG PUSCH, the original Some of the first set of power control values are associated with the first SRS resource set, and the second set of values are associated with the second SRS resource set. Use the first set of power control or the second set of power control or use the first and second sets. Power control depends on the newly added 2-bit field in DCI to indicate single TRP and multi-TRP dynamic switching.
  • pathlossReferenceIndex path loss reference index
  • SRS resource indication srs-ResourceIndicator
  • precodingAndNumberOfLayers precoding and number of layers
  • the path loss reference signals corresponding to the second TRP, SRI and TPMI are the same as those of the first The srs-ResourceIndicator field and the precodingAndNumberOfLayers field associated with each SRS resource set occupy the same number of bits.
  • configuration authorization can also be called: scheduling-free or dynamic scheduling-free.
  • the transmission solutions discussed above are all for the same carrier.
  • the terminal detects multiple DCIs on the same carrier (the existing protocol supports 2). Each DCI can schedule the corresponding PDSCH. Multiple PDSCHs are also on the same carrier, or at the same time. A neighborhood. The same is true for uplink multi-TRP transmission, which is aimed at transmission on the same carrier.
  • the characteristics of the transmission environment corresponding to the data transmission can be used to improve the reception algorithm.
  • the statistical properties of the channel can be exploited to optimize the design and parameters of the channel estimator.
  • these characteristics corresponding to data transmission are represented by quasi-co-located (QCL) information (QCL-Info).
  • the network side when the network side transmits the downlink control channel or data channel, it will pass the TCI status ( TCI state) indicates the corresponding QCL status information to the terminal.
  • a TCI state can contain the following configuration:
  • TCI status identifier (Identity, ID), used to identify a TCI status
  • a QCL information includes the following information:
  • QCL type configuration which can be one of QCL type A, QCL type B, QCL type C or QCL type D;
  • the QCL reference signal configuration includes the cell ID where the reference signal is located, the Band Width Part (BWP) ID and the identification of the reference signal (which can be the CSI-RS resource ID or SSB index).
  • BWP Band Width Part
  • the QCL type of at least one QCL information must be one of typeA, typeB, and typeC, and the QCL type of the other QCL information (if configured) must be QCL type D.
  • 'QCL-TypeA' ⁇ Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread ⁇ ;
  • the semantic fields of the TCI status may be as follows.
  • the network side can indicate the corresponding TCI status for the downlink signal or downlink channel.
  • the terminal can assume that the target downlink signal is consistent with the target downlink signal.
  • the large-scale parameters of the reference SSB or reference CSI-RS resources are the same, and the large-scale parameters are determined through QCL type configuration.
  • the terminal can adopt and receive the reference SSB or reference CSI -Receive beams with the same RS resources (i.e. Spatial Rx parameter) to receive the target downlink signal.
  • the target downlink channel (or downlink signal) and its reference SSB or reference CSI-RS resource are sent by the same TRP or the same panel or the same beam on the network side. If the transmission TRP or transmission panel or transmission beam of two downlink signals or downlink channels are different, different TCI states are usually configured.
  • the TCI status corresponding to CORESET can be indicated through RRC signaling or RRC signaling + MAC signaling.
  • the set of available TCI states is indicated through RRC signaling, and some of the TCI states are activated through Media Access Control (MAC) layer signaling, and finally the TCI state indication field in the DCI is used to activate the TCI state.
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • One or two TCI states are indicated in the activated TCI state for the PDSCH scheduled by the DCI.
  • the situation of 2 TCI states is mainly for scenarios where multiple TRPs are similar.
  • the network device indicates N candidate TCI states through RRC signaling, activates K TCI states through MAC signaling, and finally indicates from the activated TCI state through the TCI state indication field in DCI. 1 or 2 TCI status used.
  • the TCI status indication mechanism is only applicable to downlink channels and signals, and has many limitations when applied in NR systems.
  • the concept of a unified TCI state is proposed. Examples of important new functions added are as follows:
  • mode 1 Two unified TCI status modes are designed, namely mode 1 and mode 2 as follows;
  • Downlink channels (partial PDCCH, PDSCH) and signals (aperiodic CSI-RS) use the same downlink transmission indicator beam, and use downlink TCI state or joint TCI state (joint TCI state).
  • This type of TCI state is called independent TCI state (separate TCI state);
  • Uplink channels such as PUCCH or PUSCH
  • signals such as SRS
  • Uplink TCI state UL TCI state
  • joint TCI state joint TCI state
  • Unified TCI state can be dynamically updated and indicated using MAC CE and/or DCI;
  • the beam indication on a single carrier unit can be applied to multiple different CCs;
  • the uplink beam indication can be given simultaneously with the uplink power control parameters through UL TCI state or joint TCI state;
  • Mode 1 Contains Type 1 TCI state, which can be applied to uplink and downlink channels and signals; this type of TCI state is called joint TCI state (joint TCI state).
  • Mode 2 Contains two types of TCI states, of which DL TCI state is only applicable to downlink channels and signals; UL TCI state is only applicable to uplink channels and signals.
  • CORESET A It is only associated with the UE-specific search space, so it can be considered as a UE-specific downlink control channel resource, and must follow the indicated unified TCI state (Unified TCI state);
  • CORESET B It is only associated with the public search space of the community. Whether it can follow the unified TCI state (Unified TCI state) indicated by NW depends on the RRC configuration of the network device;
  • CORESET C It is associated with the UE-specific search space and the community's public search space. Whether it can follow the unified TCI state (Unified TCI state) indicated by the network device depends on the RRC configuration of the network device;
  • CORESET 0 It must be associated with the public search space of the community, and can also be associated with the UE-specific search space at the same time. Whether it can follow the unified TCI state (Unified TCI state) indicated by the network device depends on the RRC configuration of the network device.
  • the scenario of multiple TRP transmission is not considered, and only the scenario of single TRP is supported.
  • TCI state when referring to TCI state, if there is no clear indication of which TCI state it is, it includes any TCI state mentioned above, that is, TCI state can be joint TCI state, separate TCI state, or DL TCI state can also be UL TCI state, or a combination of them (that is, it contains multiple different types of TCI state).
  • TCI-State If the RRC parameter TCI-State is used (there is a connection symbol between the two words), it generally refers to DL TCI state and/or joint TCI state. If the RRC parameter is used for downlink or joint TCI state (DLorJointTCIState), it generally refers to DL TCI state and/or joint TCI state. If the RRC parameter uplink TCI state (UL-TCIState or TCI-UL-State or UL-TCI-State) is used, it generally refers to the uplink TCI state and/or joint TCI state.
  • this application proposes a solution to configure or indicate a unified TCI status, aiming at the PUSCH transmission scheme in the transmission scenario of multiple transmitting and receiving points (M-TRP)/antenna panel (panel)/beam (beam).
  • M-TRP multiple transmitting and receiving points
  • panel panel
  • beam beam
  • Provide configuration, indication and determination scheme for unified TCI state Unified TCI state).
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 200 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 5, the wireless communication method 200 may include at least part of the following content:
  • the network device sends first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set.
  • the purpose of the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set is to use Codebook based or Non-Codebook based PUSCH; wherein the first SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 TCI states, and/or the second SRS resource set is associated with TCI states among K1 TCI states are associated; or, part or all of the two SRS resources indicated by the first indication information are associated with TCI states among K1 TCI states; wherein, the K1 TCI states are uplink Transmit the corresponding currently activated TCI status, K1 is a positive integer;
  • S220 The terminal device receives the first indication information.
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 TCI states. That is, the embodiment of the present application clarifies the TCI status associated with the first SRS resource set and/or the second SRS resource set, so that the TCI status associated with the first SRS resource set can be determined based on the first SRS resource set and its associated TCI status.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH, and/or the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the second SRS resource set is determined based on the second SRS resource set and its associated TCI state.
  • some or all of the two SRS resources are associated with TCI states among the K1 TCI states. That is, the embodiment of the present application clarifies that some or all of the two SRS resources are The association relationship between the resource and the TCI state, so that the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the SRS resource can be determined based on the SRS resource and its associated TCI state.
  • the K1 TCI states are the currently activated (active or activated) TCI states corresponding to the uplink transmission, or it can also be expressed as the K1 TCI states are the currently used (applied) TCI states corresponding to the uplink transmission.
  • the K1 TCI states are used to determine uplink transmission; for network equipment, the K1 TCI states are used to indicate uplink transmission.
  • the TCI state among the K1 TCI states is a joint TCI state (joint TCI state), or the TCI state among the K1 TCI states is an uplink TCI state (uplink TCI state).
  • the TCI state described in the embodiments of this application is a unified TCI state (Unified TCI state).
  • the network device can indicate through an indication message that the type of the unified TCI state is a joint TCI state, that is, the TCI state among the K1 TCI states is a joint TCI state (joint TCI state); or, specifically, the network The device can indicate through an indication message that the type of the unified TCI state is independent TCI state (separate TCI state), that is, the TCI state among the K1 TCI states is the uplink TCI state (UL TCI state).
  • the first indication information may be carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, DCI signaling, MAC CE signaling.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a first SRS resource set and a second SRS resource set.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate two SRS resource sets (SRS resource sets).
  • SRS resource sets For example, among the two SRS resource sets, the one with a smaller SRS resource set ID is the first SRS resource set, and the one with a larger SRS resource set ID is the second SRS resource set.
  • the one with a larger SRS resource set ID is the first SRS resource set, and the one with a smaller SRS resource set ID is the second SRS resource set.
  • the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set are both used for PUSCH based on codebook (codebook) or non-codebook (non codebook).
  • codebook codebook
  • non-codebook non codebook
  • the usage of the two SRS resource sets indicated by the first indication information is for codebook-based PUSCH, or the usage of the two SRS resource sets indicated by the first indication information (usage) is used for PUSCH based on non codebook. That is, the RRC parameter usage in the SRS-ResourceSet in the configuration information of the two SRS resource sets indicated by the first indication information is both set to "codebook” or both are set to "nonCodebook”.
  • the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set are configured in RRC parameters, where the RRC parameters are SRS resource set addition or modification list (srs-ResourceSetToAddModList) or SRS resource set addition Or modify the list DCI-0-2 (srs-ResourceSetToAddModListDCI-0-2).
  • RRC parameters are SRS resource set addition or modification list (srs-ResourceSetToAddModList) or SRS resource set addition Or modify the list DCI-0-2 (srs-ResourceSetToAddModListDCI-0-2).
  • the configuration information of the first SRS resource set indicates following a unified TCI status
  • the configuration information of the second SRS resource set indicates following a unified TCI status
  • the first parameter or the second parameter is configured in the configuration signaling corresponding to the first SRS resource set; or the first parameter in the configuration signaling corresponding to the first SRS resource set is enabled (enabled), or , the second parameter in the configuration signaling corresponding to the first SRS resource set is enabled.
  • the first parameter is: followUnifiedTCIstateSRS (followUnifiedTCIstateSRS)
  • the second parameter is: followUnifiedTCIstate (followUnifiedTCIstate).
  • the first parameter or the second parameter is configured in the configuration signaling corresponding to the second SRS resource set; or the first parameter in the configuration signaling corresponding to the second SRS resource set is enabled (enabled), or , the second parameter in the configuration signaling corresponding to the second SRS resource set is enabled.
  • the first parameter is: followUnifiedTCIstateSRS (followUnifiedTCIstateSRS)
  • the second parameter is: followUnifiedTCIstate (followUnifiedTCIstate).
  • the semantic field where followUnifiedTCIstateSRS is enabled can be as follows:
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and/or the second SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and K1> In the case of 1, the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states. That is, when K1>1, the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state, and the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state.
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and/or the second SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and the K1
  • the TCI states only include the first TCI state
  • one of the two SRS resources is associated with One TCI state among the K1 TCI states is associated, and the other SRS resource among the two SRS resources is associated with another TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • One TCI state in the state is associated; or, one SRS resource of the two SRS resources is associated with the TCI state in the K1 TCI states, and the other SRS resource of the two SRS resources is not associated with a TCI state.
  • one of the two SRS resources belongs to the first SRS resource set, and the other of the two SRS resources belongs to the second SRS resource set.
  • the terminal device receives seventh indication information sent by the network device, where the seventh indication information can be used to indicate that the unified TCI state type is a joint TCI state (joint TCI state).
  • the joint TCI state can be used for uplink operation (UL operation) or uplink transmission (UL transmission), and can also be used for downlink operation (DL operation) or downlink transmission/reception (DL transmission/reception).
  • the seventh indication information is indicated by the RRC information element (IE) parameter unified TCI state type (unifiedTCI-StateType), whose value is "Joint”.
  • the seventh indication information is configured for a serving cell.
  • the seventh indication information is indicated in the RRC Information Element (IE) parameter ServingCellConfig.
  • the terminal device receives eighth indication information sent by the network device, where the eighth indication information is used to configure or indicate a group of TCI states (for convenience of description, denoted as the first TCI state group),
  • the first TCI status group includes multiple TCI statuses.
  • the first TCI status group may be used for uplink operation or uplink transmission, or may be the same as downlink operation or downlink transmission.
  • the eighth indication information is configured through RRC parameters.
  • the eighth indication information is configured in the RRC information element (IE) parameter PDSCH configuration (PDSCH-Config).
  • the eighth indication information is indicated through the RRC information element (IE) parameter downlink or joint TCI state list (dl-OrJoint-TCIStateList).
  • the terminal device receives seventh indication information sent by the network device, where the seventh indication information can be used to indicate that the unified TCI state type is an independent TCI state (separate TCI state).
  • the uplink TCI status can be used for uplink operation (UL operation) or uplink transmission (UL transmission); the downlink TCI status can be used for downlink operation (DL operation) or downlink transmission/reception (DL transmission/reception).
  • the seventh indication information is indicated by the RRC information element (IE) parameter unified TCI state type (unifiedTCI-StateType), whose value is "Separate”.
  • the seventh indication information is configured for a serving cell.
  • the seventh indication information is indicated in the RRC Information Element (IE) parameter ServingCellConfig.
  • the terminal device receives ninth indication information sent by the network device, where the ninth indication information is used to configure or indicate a second TCI status group, and the second TCI status group includes one or more DLs. TCI status.
  • the second TCI status group is used for downlink operation or downlink transmission.
  • the ninth indication information is configured through RRC parameters.
  • the ninth indication information is configured in the RRC information element (IE) parameter PDSCH configuration (PDSCH-Config).
  • the ninth indication information is downlink or joint TCI state list (dl-OrJoint-TCIStateList) through RRC information element (IE) parameter.
  • the terminal device receives the tenth indication information sent by the network device, wherein the tenth indication information is used to configure or indicate a third TCI status group, and the third TCI status group includes one or more UL TCI status.
  • the third UL TCI status group is used for uplink operation or uplink transmission.
  • the tenth indication information is configured through RRC parameters.
  • the tenth indication information is configured in the RRC IE parameter target uplink BWP (BWP-UplinkDedicated).
  • the tenth indication information is indicated by the RRC IE parameter uplink TCI addition or modification list (ul-TCI-ToAddModList).
  • the terminal device receives the second indication information sent by the network device, where the second indication information is the indication information sent by the network device at least for indicating or activating the TCI state.
  • the second indication information is carried through the first MAC CE signaling; wherein the first MAC CE signaling also includes at least one of the following: serving cell indication information, downlink BWP indication information, and uplink BWP indication information. , one or more TCI quantity indication fields, one or more TCI type indication fields, and one or more TCI status indication fields.
  • serving cell indication information downlink BWP indication information
  • uplink BWP indication information uplink BWP indication information
  • TCI quantity indication fields one or more TCI type indication fields
  • TCI status indication fields one or more TCI status indication fields.
  • using MAC CE signaling has lower latency than RRC signaling, and also has better transmission reliability, making it easier for the network to quickly instruct the UE to perform corresponding operations.
  • the serving cell indication information may be, for example, a serving cell ID (serving cell ID) to indicate the corresponding serving cell to which the first MAC CE signaling is applied.
  • the length of the information field (field) corresponding to the serving cell indication information is 5 bits.
  • the downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP) indication information may be a DL BWP ID to indicate the corresponding DL BWP to which the first MAC CE signaling is applied.
  • the length of the information field (field) corresponding to the downlink bandwidth part (DL BWP) indication information is 2 bits.
  • the uplink bandwidth part (UL BWP) indication information may be the UL BWP ID to indicate the corresponding UL BWP to which the first MAC CE signaling is applied.
  • the length of the information field (field) corresponding to the uplink bandwidth part (UL BWP) indication information is 2 bits.
  • each TCI quantity indication field in one or more TCI quantity indication fields indicates that one code point (codepoint) corresponds to one or more TCI states.
  • each TCI type indication field in one or more TCI type indication fields is used to indicate that the corresponding TCI state is a downlink TCI state, an uplink TCI state, or a joint TCI state.
  • each TCI status indication field indicates one TCI status
  • the one TCI status belongs to the above-mentioned first TCI status group.
  • each TCI status indication field indicates whether the corresponding TCI status exists.
  • the TCI status indication field and another TCI status indication field are in the same byte (Octet, Oct).
  • each TCI quantity indication field indicates that one code point corresponds to N TCI states. Therefore, the total number of uplink TCI status and downlink TCI status can be indicated, which can reduce the number of bits and compress the overhead of MAC CE signaling.
  • each TCI quantity indication field has 2 bits, or each TCI quantity indication field has 3 bits.
  • each TCI quantity indication field indicates that one codepoint corresponds to 1 or 2 joint TCI states (Joint TCI state). This embodiment may specifically correspond to Example 1 above.
  • the value of N can be a value among 1, 2, 3, and 4. Therefore, the protocol design and system implementation are simple, most of the performance gains of multi-TRP (M-TRP) can be obtained, and the network configuration and scheduling are relatively flexible.
  • the number of downlink TCI states is less than or equal to 2.
  • the number of uplink TCI states is less than or equal to 2. This embodiment may specifically correspond to the above Example 2.
  • the value of N can be a value among 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. Therefore, more TRPs can be supported for downlink transmission, and in some scenarios, downlink performance can be improved, providing greater freedom for network optimization.
  • the number of downlink TCI states is less than or equal to 4.
  • the number of uplink TCI states is less than or equal to 2. This embodiment may specifically correspond to the above Example 2.
  • the value of N can be a value among 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Therefore, more TRPs can be supported for downlink and uplink transmission. In some scenarios, downlink and uplink performance can be improved, providing greater freedom for network optimization.
  • the number of downlink TCI states is less than or equal to 4.
  • the number of uplink TCI states is less than or equal to 4. This embodiment may specifically correspond to the above Example 2.
  • each TCI quantity indication field indicates that one codepoint corresponds to 1, 2, 3, or 4 joint TCI states (Joint TCI states). Therefore, more TRPs can be supported for downlink and uplink transmission. In some scenarios, downlink and uplink performance can be improved, providing greater freedom for network optimization.
  • the TCI number indicates that the number of domains is 8, or 16. This embodiment may specifically correspond to Example 1 above.
  • the TCI status type indication field in one or more TCI type indication fields is used to indicate that the corresponding TCI status is a downlink TCI status, an uplink TCI status, or a combined TCI status.
  • the TCI status type indication field is used to indicate whether the TCI status indication information in the same octet indicates the downlink TCI status, the joint TCI status, or the uplink TCI status.
  • the TCI status type indication field is used to indicate whether the TCI status indication information of the same octet indicates the TCI status in the second TCI status group or the TCI status in the third TCI status group.
  • the TCI status indication information (ie, the second indication information), optionally, if the TCI status indication information is used to indicate the downlink TCI status or the joint TCI status, then the length of the TCI status indication information is 7 bits.
  • the TCI status indication information (ie, the second indication information)
  • the length of the TCI status indication information is 7 bits. Therefore, more uplink TCI states can be indicated, improving network scheduling flexibility.
  • the TCI status indication information (ie, the second indication information), optionally, if the TCI status indication information is used to indicate the uplink TCI status, then the most significant bit (the most significant bit) in the TCI status indication information is reserved. bits, the remaining 6 bits indicate UL TCI state.
  • the first MAC CE signaling may also include TCI status subset number (or DCI code point) quantity indication information, which may indicate a positive integer between 1 and S, where S may be TCI Quantity indicates the number of fields. Therefore, the UE can be reduced in reading/parsing some bits of information and the terminal implementation complexity can be reduced.
  • this value can be the number of codepoints in the first domain in DCI corresponding to the TCI status indicated in the second MAC CE; optionally, the first domain is the transmission configuration indication (Transmission configuration indication) domain in DCI.
  • the maximum number of TCI states indicated by the first MAC CE is 32, 48, or 64; or, the maximum number of TCI states activated by the first MAC CE is 32, or 48, or 64. That is, the maximum number of TCI states indicated by the second indication information is 32, 48, or 64.
  • the maximum number when the maximum number is 48, it supports up to 4 TRP transmissions in downlink and 2 TRP transmissions in uplink, which improves downlink transmission performance, improves the flexibility of network configuration and scheduling, and also controls the UE implementation complexity within a certain range. .
  • the maximum number is 64, it supports up to 4 TRP transmissions in downlink and 4 TRP transmissions in uplink, which improves downlink and uplink transmission performance and improves the flexibility of network configuration and scheduling at the expense of UE implementation complexity.
  • the first TCI state is determined based on the TCI state identifier in the K1 TCI states, and/or, the second TCI state is based on the TCI in the K1 TCI states.
  • Status ID OK That is, the TCI status corresponding to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set can be determined based on preset rules (ie, TCI status identification), which can effectively reduce product implementation complexity.
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the TCI status identifier may also be called a TCI status index or a TCI status number, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first TCI state is determined based on the position information of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information, and/or, the second TCI state is based on the K1 TCIs.
  • the position information of the status in the second indication information is determined; wherein, the second indication information is indication information sent by the network device for at least indicating or activating the TCI status, and the TCI status indicated or activated by the second indication information at least includes The K1 TCI status. That is, the TCI states corresponding to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set can be determined based on preset rules (ie, the location information of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information), which can effectively reduce product implementation complexity.
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information.
  • the first TCI state is the last TCI state among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information
  • the second TCI state is the last TCI state among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information. The highest TCI status in the information.
  • the first TCI state is indicated by the network device through third indication information
  • the second TCI state is indicated by the network device through fourth indication information. That is, the network device may indicate the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states through the third indication information, and/or the network device may indicate the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states through the fourth indication information.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among K1 TCI states, or the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is K1
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state at the rear of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information; wherein the second indication information is sent by the network device at least to indicate or activate the TCI state.
  • indication information, and the TCI states indicated or activated by the second indication information include at least the K1 TCI states. Therefore, the TCI status corresponding to the first SRS resource set can be determined based on the third indication information, and signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among K1 TCI states, or the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is K1 The TCI state with the largest identifier among the TCI states, or the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information, or the fourth The indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the TCI state with the lowest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information; wherein, the second indication information is sent by the network device at least to indicate or activate the TCI state.
  • indication information, and the TCI states indicated or activated by the second indication information include at least the K1 TCI states. Therefore, the TCI status corresponding to the second SRS resource set can be determined based on the fourth indication information, and signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the K1 TCI state.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state that is the last of K1 TCIs in the second indication information
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is K1 TCIs.
  • the state is the TCI state with the highest position in the second indication information.
  • the first TCI state is the K1 TCI state.
  • the TCI state with the smallest identifier in The largest TCI state is identified among the K1 TCI states. Therefore, the TCI status corresponding to the first SRS resource set can be determined based on whether the third indication information is obtained, or the TCI status corresponding to the first SRS resource set can be determined based on whether the network device is configured with the third indication information, which can reduce signaling overhead.
  • the first TCI state is the K1 TCI state.
  • the second TCI state is the K1 TCI state.
  • the TCI state with the smallest identifier in The largest TCI state is identified among the K1 TCI states. Therefore, the TCI status corresponding to the second SRS resource set can be determined based on whether the fourth indication information is obtained, or the TCI status corresponding to the second SRS resource set can be determined based on whether the network device is configured with the fourth indication information, which can reduce signaling overhead.
  • the second TCI state is the K1 TCI state.
  • the terminal device does not obtain the third indication information and the fourth indication information, or if the network device does not configure the third indication information and the fourth indication information, the third indication information and the fourth indication information are not configured.
  • One TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states; and, the terminal device obtains the third indication information and the third indication information.
  • the first TCI state identifies the largest TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the The first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the The second TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the first TCI state when the third indication information is a first value, the first TCI state identifies the smallest TCI state among the K1 TCI states; and/or, when the third indication information is In the case of the second value, the first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states. Therefore, the TCI status corresponding to the first SRS resource set can be determined based on the third indication information, and the signaling structure is flexible to facilitate future expansion to the situation of K1>2.
  • the first TCI state when the third indication information is a first value, the first TCI state identifies the largest TCI state among the K1 TCI states; and/or, when the third indication information is In the case of the second value, the first TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states. Therefore, the TCI status corresponding to the first SRS resource set can be determined based on the third indication information, and the signaling structure is flexible to facilitate future expansion to the situation of K1>2.
  • the second TCI state identifies the smallest TCI state among the K1 TCI states; and/or, when the fourth indication information is In the case of the second value, the second TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states. Therefore, the TCI status corresponding to the second SRS resource set can be determined based on the fourth indication information, and the signaling structure is flexible to facilitate future expansion to the situation of K1>2.
  • the second TCI state identifies the largest TCI state among the K1 TCI states; and/or, when the fourth indication information is In the case of the second value, the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states. Therefore, the TCI status corresponding to the second SRS resource set can be determined based on the fourth indication information, and the signaling structure is flexible to facilitate future expansion to the situation of K1>2.
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among K1 TCI states
  • the second TCI state is K1 The TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the third indication information is the second value and the fourth indication information is the second value
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • TCI state the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the second TCI state is The TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the third indication information is the second value and the fourth indication information is the second value
  • the first TCI state is the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • TCI state the second TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the third indication information is included in the configuration information of the first SRS resource set, and/or the fourth indication information is included in the configuration information of the second SRS resource set.
  • the configuration information of the first SRS resource set when the configuration information of the first SRS resource set includes the third indication information, the configuration information of the first SRS resource set does not include: followUnifiedTCIstateSRS or followUnifiedTCIstate, or, the first SRS The configuration information of the resource set includes: disable followUnifiedTCIstateSRS or followUnifiedTCIstate, or the terminal device ignores followUnifiedTCIstateSRS or followUnifiedTCIstate in the configuration information of the first SRS resource set.
  • the configuration information of the second SRS resource set when the configuration information of the second SRS resource set includes the fourth indication information, the configuration information of the second SRS resource set does not include followUnifiedTCIstateSRS or followUnifiedTCIstate, or the second SRS resource
  • the configuration information of the set includes disable followUnifiedTCIstateSRS or followUnifiedTCIstate, or the terminal device ignores followUnifiedTCIstateSRS or followUnifiedTCIstate in the configuration information of the second SRS resource set.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state, and/or the second SRS resource set corresponds to The uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship is determined based on the second TCI state.
  • the uplink transmit spatial filter (UL TX spatial filter) or spatial relationship (spatial relation) corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set is based on the first TCI state and/or the first SRS resource set is determined.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state and the first SRS resource set.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set is based on the The reference signal corresponding to typeD in the first TCI state is determined by the first SRS resource set.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set is based on the The reference signal in the first TCI state is determined by the first SRS resource set.
  • the uplink transmit spatial filter (UL TX spatial filter) or spatial relationship (spatial relation) corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the second SRS resource set is based on the second TCI state and/or the second SRS resource set is determined.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the second SRS resource set is determined based on the second TCI state and the second SRS resource set.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the second SRS resource set is based on the The reference signal corresponding to typeD in the second TCI state is determined by the second SRS resource set.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the second SRS resource set is based on the The reference signal in the second TCI state is determined by the second SRS resource set.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set is based on the first TCI state and/or Or the first SRS resource set is determined.
  • the PUSCH corresponding to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set is The uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship is determined based on the first TCI state and/or the first SRS resource set.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state and the first SRS resource set, and the current PUSCH transmission does not consider the first TCI state and the first SRS resource set.
  • the K1 TCI states belong to N TCI states
  • N TCI states are activated TCI states corresponding to uplink transmission, the N TCI states are configured or indicated by the network device, N is a positive integer, and K1 ⁇ N.
  • At least part of the N TCI states are used to determine uplink transmission; for network equipment, at least part of the N TCI states are used to indicate uplink transmission.
  • K1 TCI states among the N TCI states are used for uplink transmission
  • K2 TCI states among the N TCI states are used for downlink transmission.
  • the K1 TCI states are indicated by the network device through fifth indication information.
  • the network device may indicate K1 TCI states among the N TCI states through the fifth indication information. Therefore, in this embodiment, new indication information (i.e., the fifth indication information) is introduced to independently configure multi-TRP (M-TRP) transmission for uplink and downlink, reducing terminal implementation complexity and facilitating more types of terminals to support this Function.
  • M-TRP multi-TRP
  • the fifth indication information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling, and DCI signaling.
  • RRC has good reliability, but large delay
  • DCI has small delay and signaling overhead, but poor reliability
  • MAC CE has better reliability than DCI, and both signaling overhead and delay are low. Smaller than RRC.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the K1 TCI states are K1 TCI states selected from the N TCI states in a first order. Therefore, in this embodiment, K1 TCI states can be selected from N TCI states according to the preset rules (ie, the first order), which can effectively reduce product implementation complexity.
  • the first order is an order from small to large TCI status identifiers, or the first order is an order from large to small TCI status identifiers.
  • the first order may also be other types of order, for example, the order of odd-numbered TCI status identifiers from small to large, or the order of even-numbered TCI status identifiers from small to large, which is not limited by this application.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the K1 TCI states are K1 TCI states selected from the N TCI states in ascending order of TCI state identifiers.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the K1 TCI states are K1 TCI states selected from the N TCI states in descending order of TCI state identifiers.
  • the first order may be agreed upon by a protocol, or the first order may be configured by a network device.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the K1 TCI states are K1 TCI states selected in order according to the position of the N TCI states in the second indication information; wherein, the second indication information It is indication information sent by the network device for at least indicating or activating the TCI state, and the TCI state indicated or activated by the second indication information at least includes the N TCI states. Therefore, in this embodiment, K1 TCI states can be selected from the N TCI states according to the preset rules (ie, the position order of the N TCI states in the second indication information), which can effectively reduce product implementation complexity.
  • the position order of the N TCI states in the second indication information is from front to back, or the position order of the N TCI states in the second indication information is from back to front. Order.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the K1 TCI states are the K1 TCI states selected in sequence from front to back according to the positions of the N TCI states in the second indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the K1 TCI states are the K1 TCI states selected in sequence from back to front according to the positions of the N TCI states in the second indication information.
  • the N TCI states are indicated by the network device through sixth indication information. That is, the network device may directly indicate N TCI states, or the network device may indicate N TCI states from a plurality of preconfigured TCI states.
  • the N TCI states are indicated by the network device through second indication information, where the second indication information is at least indication information sent by the network device to indicate or activate the TCI state, and the second indication
  • the TCI states indicated or activated by the information include at least the N TCI states. That is, the network device may directly indicate N TCI states, or the network device may indicate N TCI states from a plurality of preconfigured TCI states.
  • the second indication information and the above-mentioned sixth indication may be the same indication information.
  • the N TCI states are determined based on the second indication information from the TCI states indicated by the network device through the sixth indication information; wherein the second indication information is sent by the network device at least for indicating or The indication information of the TCI state is activated, and the second indication information indicates or the activated TCI state includes at least the N TCI states.
  • the network device may indicate multiple TCI states through the sixth indication information, and indicate N TCI states among the multiple TCI states through the second indication information.
  • the sixth indication information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling, and DCI signaling.
  • the sixth indication information may be DCI signaling.
  • the sixth indication information is transmitted through a first field (field) in DCI signaling, and the first field is a transmission configuration indication (Transmission configuration indication) in DCI signaling. )area.
  • the terminal device may determine one or more of the following information based on the sixth indication information:
  • PUSCH uplink transmit spatial filter (UL TX spatial filter);
  • Uplink transmit spatial filter for at least part of the SRS.
  • the SRS resource set (SRS resource set) corresponding to at least part of the SRS is configured with RRC parameters: the SRS tracking the unified TCI state in r17 (followUnifiedTCIstateSRS-r17).
  • the sixth indication information and the above-mentioned second indication information may be the same information. For example, if only one codepoint corresponds to TCI state, then additional DCI is no longer needed to indicate the activated TCI state.
  • the sixth indication information is transmitted through DCI signaling.
  • the sixth indication information is transmitted through the Transmission configuration indication field in DCI signaling. For example, when there are multiple codepoints corresponding to TCI states, DCI is needed to additionally indicate which codepoint corresponding TCI state to use as the activated TCI state.
  • the DCI carrying the sixth indication information is DCI format 1_1 and/or DCI format 1_2, wherein DCI format 1_1 or DCI format 1_2 can schedule data at the same time or not schedule downlink transmission (with or without, if applicable, DL assignment ).
  • the DCI carrying the sixth indication information is DCI format 1_1 and/or DCI format 1_2 and/or DCI format 0_1 and/or DCI format 0_2, wherein DCI format 1_1/1_2 may schedule data simultaneously or not schedule downlink. Transmission (with or without, if applicable, DL assignment), DCI format 0_1/0_2 can schedule data at the same time or not schedule uplink transmission (with or without, if applicable, UL assignment).
  • the terminal device can make the following assumptions (or in other words, DCI format 1_1/1_2 meets the following conditions):
  • the DCI's Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) is scrambled by the Configured Scheduling Radio Network Temporary Identity (CS-RNTI);
  • RV Redundancy Version
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • NDI New Data Indicator
  • FDRA frequency domain resource assignment
  • FDRA frequency domain resource assignment
  • FDRA type 1 is all set to '1's
  • dynamicSwitch dynamic switching
  • TCI state TCI state is different from TCI state X; if TCI state At least one TCI state (recorded as TCI state Starting from the first slot at least BeamAppTime symbols after the last symbol of PUCCH, the TCI state Or downlink transmission/reception of corresponding QCL information, where the first PUCCH transmission carries Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request Acknowledgment (HARQ-ACK) information corresponding to the first indication information DCI.
  • HARQ-ACK Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request Acknowledgment
  • TCI state for uplink or TCI state for both uplink and downlink
  • TCI state X TCI state X
  • TCI state X TCI state X
  • TCI state A1/A2 TCI state A1/A2
  • the above process needs to be considered.
  • TCI state X can be applied.
  • the terminal equipment currently uses 1 or 2 TCI states (denoted as A1, A2) to determine the QCL information corresponding to the downlink transmission.
  • the current DCI indication signal contains TCI state X, and TCI state X and TCI If state A1/A2 are different, you need to consider the above process to determine when TCI state X can be applied.
  • uplink transmission is performed based on a certain TCI state, or TCI state is used for uplink transmission, that is, the spatial relationship corresponding to the uplink transmission is determined based on the TCI state, or the corresponding uplink transmission spatial filter is determined.
  • TCI state is UL TCI state
  • the spatial relationship of the uplink transmission or the uplink transmission spatial filter is determined based on the reference signal in this UL TCI state.
  • the TCI state is joint TCI state
  • the spatial relationship of uplink transmission or the uplink transmission spatial filter is determined based on the reference signal corresponding to type D (typeD) in this joint TCI state.
  • the terminal device sends first terminal capability information
  • the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports Z1 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports transmission configuration indication in DCI.
  • a code point (codepoint) in the (Transmission configuration indication) field activates or indicates at most Z1 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment is on CG PUSCH Support Z1 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, where Z1 is a positive integer and Z1>1.
  • the terminal device can report the first terminal capability information to the network device, so that the network device can activate or indicate a unified TCI state for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission based on the first terminal capability information.
  • Z1 is 2, or Z1 is 4.
  • the first terminal capability information is reported according to at least one of the following granularities:
  • the first terminal capability information is reported according to the frequency band granularity (per band), that is, the first terminal capability is reported for the frequency band (band) (that is, different frequency bands can independently report corresponding capabilities). Therefore, in this case, different frequency bands are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom. For example, the terminal can support this function in one or certain frequency bands, but other bands do not support this function. This allows more terminals to support this new feature.
  • the first terminal capability information is reported according to the frequency band combination granularity (per band combination), that is, the first terminal capability is reported independently according to the frequency band combination (band combination). Therefore, in this case, different frequency band combinations are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom. For example, the terminal may not support this function in a certain frequency band combination, but support it in another frequency band combination. This feature allows more terminals to support this new feature.
  • the first terminal capability information is reported according to the frequency band granularity (per band per band combination) in the frequency band combination. That is, the first terminal capability is reported independently according to each frequency band in the frequency band combination (band combination) (i.e., different The frequency bands in the frequency band combination can be reported independently). Therefore, in this case, different frequency band combinations are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom. For example, the terminal may not support this function under a certain CA, but use certain frequency bands under another CA combination. (band) supports this feature, allowing more terminals to support this new feature.
  • the first terminal capability information is reported according to the carrier granularity (per CC per band per band combination or per Feature Set Per Component-carrier) on each frequency band in the frequency band combination. That is, the first terminal capability is reported according to the frequency band combination.
  • Each carrier in each frequency band (band combination) is reported independently (that is, different carrier CCs in different frequency band combinations can be reported independently). Therefore, in this case, different frequency band combinations can be reported independently, and different carriers on a band can also be reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom, allowing more terminals to support this new Function.
  • the first terminal capability information is reported according to the frequency range granularity (per frequency range), that is, the first terminal capability is reported according to the frequency range (Frequency range, FR) (that is, different FRs can be reported independently, per FR, That is, FR1 and FR2 are reported independently). Therefore, in this case, different FRs are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom.
  • the terminal low frequency (FR1) does not support this function, but it supports this function in FR2 (high frequency), so that More terminals can be enabled to support this new feature.
  • the first terminal capability information is reported according to the terminal granularity (per UE), that is, the first terminal capability is reported for the UE (i.e. per UE), which means that if the UE reports this capability, it can be supported on all frequency bands. this ability). Therefore, in this case, the signaling overhead for terminal capability reporting is reduced.
  • the first terminal capability information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling.
  • the terminal device sends second terminal capability information
  • the second terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports CG PUSCH.
  • the terminal device can report the second terminal capability information to the network device, so that the network device can determine that the terminal device supports CG PUSCH based on the second terminal capability information.
  • the second terminal capability information is reported according to at least one of the following granularities:
  • the second terminal capability information is reported according to frequency band granularity (per band), that is, the second terminal capability is reported for the frequency band (band) (that is, different frequency bands can independently report corresponding capabilities). Therefore, in this case, different frequency bands are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom. For example, the terminal can support this function in one or certain frequency bands, but other bands do not support this function. This allows more terminals to support this new feature.
  • the second terminal capability information is reported according to the frequency band combination granularity (per band combination), that is, the second terminal capability is reported independently according to the frequency band combination (band combination). Therefore, in this case, different frequency band combinations are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom. For example, the terminal may not support this function in a certain frequency band combination, but support it in another frequency band combination. This feature allows more terminals to support this new feature.
  • the second terminal capability information is reported according to the frequency band granularity (per band per band combination) in the frequency band combination, that is, the second terminal capability is reported independently according to each frequency band in the frequency band combination (band combination) (i.e. different The frequency bands in the frequency band combination can be reported independently). Therefore, in this case, different frequency band combinations are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom.
  • the terminal may not support this function under a certain CA, but use certain frequency bands under another CA combination. (band) supports this feature so that more terminals can support this new feature.
  • the second terminal capability information is reported according to the carrier granularity (per CC per band per band combination or per FSPC) on each frequency band in the frequency band combination. That is, the second terminal capability is reported according to the frequency band combination (band combination).
  • Each carrier on each frequency band is independently reported (that is, different carrier CCs in different frequency band combinations can be independently reported). Therefore, in this case, different frequency band combinations can be reported independently, and different carriers on a band can also be reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom, allowing more terminals to support this new Function.
  • the second terminal capability information is reported according to the frequency range granularity (per frequency range), that is, the second terminal capability is reported according to the frequency range (Frequency range, FR) (that is, different FRs can be reported independently, per FR, That is, FR1 and FR2 are reported independently). Therefore, in this case, different FRs are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom.
  • the terminal low frequency (FR1) does not support this function, but it supports this function in FR2 (high frequency), so that More terminals can be enabled to support this new feature.
  • the second terminal capability information is reported according to the terminal granularity (per UE), that is, the second terminal capability is reported for the UE (i.e. per UE), which means that if the UE reports this capability, it can be supported on all frequency bands. this ability). Therefore, in this case, the signaling overhead for terminal capability reporting is reduced.
  • the reporting granularity of the first terminal capability information and the reporting granularity of the second terminal capability information may be the same or different.
  • the reporting granularity of a terminal capability information is band
  • the reporting granularity of a terminal capability information is per CC per band per band combination. Because uplink and downlink have different requirements for terminal capabilities, using different options for uplink and downlink capabilities can be more beneficial to the terminal. accomplish.
  • the second terminal capability information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling.
  • the second terminal capability information and the first terminal capability information are transmitted through the same signaling, or the second terminal capability information and the first terminal capability information are transmitted through different signaling.
  • the terminal device sends third terminal capability information
  • the third terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports Z2 unified TCI states for simultaneous uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the third terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports transmission configuration in DCI
  • a code point in the Transmission configuration indication field activates at most or indicates Z2 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission at the same time, or the third terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports CG PUSCH Z2 unified TCI states are used for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission at the same time, where Z2 is a positive integer, and Z2>1.
  • the terminal device can report the third terminal capability information to the network device, so that the network device can activate or indicate a unified TCI state for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission based on the third terminal capability information.
  • Z2 is 2, or Z2 is 4.
  • the third terminal capability information is reported according to at least one of the following granularities:
  • the third terminal capability information is reported according to frequency band granularity (per band), that is, the third terminal capability is reported for the frequency band (band) (that is, different frequency bands can independently report corresponding capabilities). Therefore, in this case, different frequency bands are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom. For example, the terminal can support this function in one or certain frequency bands, but other bands do not support this function. This allows more terminals to support this new feature.
  • the third terminal capability information is reported according to the frequency band combination granularity (per band combination), that is, the third terminal capability is reported independently according to the frequency band combination (band combination). Therefore, in this case, different frequency band combinations are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom. For example, the terminal may not support this function in a certain frequency band combination, but support it in another frequency band combination. This feature allows more terminals to support this new feature.
  • the third terminal capability information is reported according to the frequency band granularity (per band per band combination) in the frequency band combination, that is, the third terminal capability is reported independently according to each frequency band in the frequency band combination (band combination) (i.e. different The frequency bands in the frequency band combination can be reported independently). Therefore, in this case, different frequency band combinations are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom. For example, the terminal may not support this function under a certain CA, but use certain frequency bands under another CA combination. (band) supports this feature, allowing more terminals to support this new feature.
  • the third terminal capability information is reported according to the carrier granularity (per CC per band per band combination or per FSPC) on each frequency band in the frequency band combination. That is, the third terminal capability is reported according to the frequency band combination (band combination).
  • Each carrier on each frequency band is independently reported (that is, different carrier CCs in different frequency band combinations can be independently reported). Therefore, in this case, different frequency band combinations can be reported independently, and different carriers on a band can also be reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom, allowing more terminals to support this new Function.
  • the third terminal capability information is reported according to the frequency range granularity (per frequency range), that is, the third terminal capability is reported according to the frequency range (Frequency range, FR) (that is, different FRs can be reported independently, per FR, That is, FR1 and FR2 are reported independently). Therefore, in this case, different FRs are reported independently, which allows the terminal to have greater freedom.
  • the terminal low frequency (FR1) does not support this function, but it supports this function in FR2 (high frequency), so that More terminals can be enabled to support this new feature.
  • the third terminal capability information is reported according to the terminal granularity (per UE), that is, the third terminal capability is reported for the UE (that is, per UE), which means that if the UE reports this capability, it can be supported on all frequency bands. this ability). Therefore, in this case, the signaling overhead for terminal capability reporting is reduced.
  • the reporting granularity of the first terminal capability information and the reporting granularity of the third terminal capability information may be the same or different.
  • the reporting granularity of a terminal capability information is band
  • the reporting granularity of a terminal capability information is per CC per band per band combination. Because uplink and downlink have different requirements for terminal capabilities, using different options for uplink and downlink capabilities can be more beneficial to the terminal. accomplish.
  • the third terminal capability information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling.
  • the difference between the first terminal capability information and the third terminal capability information can be shown by the following example.
  • the terminal device can support 2 TCI states (denoted as A1, A2) through the first terminal capability information report. If PUSCH has multiple repeated transmissions, then one of the TCI states is used in each PUSCH transmission, but different PUSCH times are used. Transmissions can use different TCI states. For example, PUSCH is transmitted repeatedly 4 times, and the corresponding TCI states may be A1, A2, A1, and A2. That is, A1 and A2 are not used in one transmission at the same time, or in other words, A1 and A2 are not used simultaneously to determine a PUSCH transmission.
  • the terminal device can support 2 TCI states (denoted as A1, A2) through the third terminal capability information report. If PUSCH has multiple repeated transmissions, then the two TCI states (i.e. A1+A2) are used in each transmission. Confirm PUSCH transmission. For example, PUSCH is transmitted repeatedly 4 times, and the corresponding TCI states are A1+A2, A1+A2, A1+A2, and A1+A2.
  • Embodiment 1 determining the PUSCH with configuration grant (CG) type 1 (CG PUSCH Type1 ) corresponding to the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship scheme (i.e. Embodiment 2), or determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship scheme corresponding to the PUSCH of configuration grant (CG) type 2 (CG PUSCH Type2) ( That is, Example 3).
  • the terminal equipment receives the first DCI, where the first DCI is used to schedule the first PUSCH; and the terminal equipment determines the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH according to the first information; or, The uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH and the transmission of the first PUSCH are determined according to the first information.
  • the first information is at least one of the following: the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states, the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states, the first SRS resource set, and the second SRS resource set.
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state
  • both the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set are associated with the first TCI state; or, the first The SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state, and the second SRS resource set is not associated with the TCI state.
  • the terminal device receives the first DCI only after receiving the above-mentioned second indication information and/or the sixth indication information.
  • the format of the first DCI may be DCI format 0_0, or the format of the first DCI may be DCI format 0_1, or the format of the first DCI may be DCI format 0_2.
  • the terminal device determines according to the preset TCI state among the first TCI state and the second TCI state.
  • the terminal device can use the TCI state with the smallest ID among the K1 TCI states to determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH.
  • the terminal device can use the TCI state with the largest ID among the K1 TCI states to determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH.
  • the terminal device can use the TCI state with the highest position in the third indication information among the K1 TCI states to determine the uplink transmission spatial filter corresponding to the first PUSCH. or spatial relationship.
  • the terminal device can use the TCI state at the rear of the third indication information among the K1 TCI states to determine the uplink transmission spatial filter corresponding to the first PUSCH. or spatial relationship.
  • the terminal device determines the TCI status indicated by the network device in the first TCI status and the second TCI status. Determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH. Therefore, in this embodiment, using new indication information for flexible configuration can increase system flexibility and provide a degree of freedom for network optimization.
  • the terminal device receives eleventh indication information sent by the network device, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate the TCI in the first TCI state and the second TCI state. state; and the terminal equipment determines which TCI state among the first TCI state and the second TCI state is used to determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH according to the eleventh indication information.
  • the eleventh indication information may be carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC signaling, or DCI signaling.
  • the eleventh indication information may indicate using the TCI state with the smaller ID among the first TCI state and the second TCI state to determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH.
  • the eleventh indication information may indicate using the TCI state with a larger ID among the first TCI state and the second TCI state to determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH.
  • the eleventh indication information may indicate that the uplink transmission space corresponding to the first PUSCH is determined using the first TCI state among the first TCI state and the second TCI state in the above-mentioned second indication information. Filter or spatial relationship.
  • the eleventh indication information may indicate that the TCI state located at the rear of the first TCI state and the second TCI state in the second indication information is used to determine the uplink transmission space corresponding to the first PUSCH. Filter or spatial relationship.
  • the terminal device determines the first TCI state, the first SRS resource set, and the first DCI format 0_2.
  • the second TCI state and the second SRS resource set determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH and the transmission of the first PUSCH.
  • the terminal device determines the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH according to the first SRS resource set and the first TCI state. and the transmission of the first PUSCH.
  • the terminal device determines the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH based on the second SRS resource set and the first TCI state. and the transmission of the first PUSCH.
  • the first PUSCH if the first PUSCH needs to be repeatedly transmitted M times (for example, the first PUSCH may be transmitted in M consecutive time slots); for another example, the first PUSCH may have M nominal repetitions. Biography (nominal repetitions)).
  • the first transmission is the initial transmission, and M is a positive integer.
  • the first DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
  • the SRS resource indication field in DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2 indicates the first value (for example, codepoint is "00")
  • the first SRS resource set and the corresponding The first TCI state is used for M repeated transmissions of the first PUSCH.
  • the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used for M repeated transmissions of the first PUSCH, which can also be expressed as, the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used to determine the first PUSCH.
  • the first DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
  • the SRS resource indication field in DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2 indicates the second value (for example, codepoint is "01")
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding The second TCI state is used for M repeated transmissions.
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for M repeated transmissions of the first PUSCH, which can also be expressed as, the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used to determine the first PUSCH.
  • the first DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2, when the SRS resource indication field in DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2 indicates the third value (for example, codepoint is "10").
  • the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used for the first transmission of the first PUSCH (for example, the first slot among M consecutive slots, or in M nominal retransmissions) the first retransmission)
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for the second transmission of the first PUSCH (for example, the second slot among M consecutive slots, or M nominal retransmissions the second retransmission).
  • the RRC information element PUSCH configuration (RRC IE PUSCH-Config) indicates cyclic mapping (cyclicMapping) (that is, cyclicMapping is enabled)
  • the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state Used for the first transmission of the first PUSCH for example, the first slot among M consecutive slots, or the first retransmission among M nominal retransmissions
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state Used for the second transmission of the first PUSCH for example, the second slot among M consecutive slots, or the second retransmission among M nominal retransmissions
  • the same mapping pattern is repeated in sequence until a total of M times Transmission (the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots).
  • the corresponding SRS resource sets are: the first SRS resource set, the second SRS resource set, the first SRS resource set, and the second SRS resource set.
  • the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used for the first The first and second transmissions of PUSCH (for example, the first and second slots among M consecutive slots, or the first and second retransmissions among M nominal retransmissions), the second SRS resource The set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for the 3rd and 4th transmission of the first PUSCH (for example, the 3rd and 4th slots in M consecutive slots, or the 3rd time in M nominal retransmissions and the fourth retransmission), and the same mapping pattern is repeated in sequence until a total of M transmissions (the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots).
  • the corresponding SRS resource sets are: first SRS resource set, first SRS resource set, second SRS resource set, second SRS resource set, first SRS resource set, first SRS Resource set, second SRS resource set, second SRS resource set.
  • the first DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2, when the SRS resource indication field in DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2 indicates the fourth value (for example, codepoint is "11").
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for the first transmission of the first PUSCH (for example, the first slot among M consecutive slots, or M nominal retransmissions) the first retransmission)
  • the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used for the second transmission of the first PUSCH (for example, the second slot among M consecutive slots, or M nominal retransmissions the second retransmission).
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for the first transmission of the first PUSCH ( For example, the first slot among M consecutive slots, or the first retransmission among M nominal retransmissions), the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used for the second transmission of the first PUSCH ( For example, the second slot among M consecutive slots, or the second retransmission among M nominal retransmissions), the same mapping pattern is repeated in sequence until a total of M transmissions (the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots).
  • the corresponding SRS resource sets are: the second SRS resource set, the first SRS resource set, the second SRS resource set, and the first SRS resource set.
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for the first and second times of the first PUSCH.
  • the first SRS resource set (such as the 1st and 2nd slots among M consecutive slots, or the 1st and 2nd retransmissions among M nominal retransmissions), the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI
  • the status is used for the 3rd and 4th transmissions of the first PUSCH (such as the 3rd and 4th slots in M consecutive slots, or the 3rd and 4th retransmissions in M nominal retransmissions) , the same mapping pattern is repeated in sequence until a total of M transmissions (the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots).
  • the corresponding SRS resource sets are: the second SRS resource set, the second SRS resource set, the first SRS resource set, the first SRS resource set, the second SRS resource set, the second SRS Resource set, first SRS resource set, first SRS resource set.
  • One example is to use the first SRS resource.
  • only use the second SRS resource set and the K1 1 TCI state to perform the first PUSCH transmission.
  • the first DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
  • the value of the SRS resource set indication field in DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2 is restricted. It can only take part of the value and cannot take another part of the value. For example It can only take the first value mentioned above (for example, codepoint can only be "00"), or it can only take the second value mentioned above (for example, codepoint can only be "01”), or it can only take the first value and the first value mentioned above. One of two values (for example, codepoint can only be "00" or "01").
  • the first SRS resource set corresponds to the "SRS resource indicator (SRS resource indicator)" indication field in the first DCI
  • the second SRS resource set corresponds to the "Second SRS resource indicator (Second SRS resource indicator)" in the first DCI. )” indicates the domain.
  • the SRI indicated by the "SRS resource indicator (SRS resource indicator)" indication field in the first DCI corresponds to a certain SRS resource in the first SRS resource set
  • the SRI indicated by the "Second SRS resource indicator” indication field in the first DCI Corresponds to a certain SRS resource in the second SRS resource set.
  • the terminal device receives the twelfth indication information sent by the network device, where the twelfth indication information is used to indicate that in the first PUSCH single transmission, the terminal device receives the twelfth indication information according to the first TCI state and The second TCI state determines the transmission of the first PUSCH. For example, according to the twelfth indication information, in each transmission of the first PUSCH (if there are multiple transmissions), the terminal device simultaneously determines the uplink transmission space corresponding to the first PUSCH according to the first TCI state and the second TCI state. Filter or spatial relationship.
  • the twelfth indication information can be carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling, or DCI signaling.
  • the twelfth indication information may be configured for BWP, that is, the configuration granularity of the twelfth indication information is BWP.
  • the twelfth indication information is configured through the RRC parameter PUSCH-Config.
  • Embodiment 2 The terminal equipment determines the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the second PUSCH and the transmission of the second PUSCH according to the second information;
  • the second PUSCH is a PUSCH of CG type 1
  • the second PUSCH corresponds to the first SRS resource and/or the second SRS resource
  • the first SRS resource is one of the two SRS resources, so
  • the second SRS resource is the other SRS resource among the two SRS resources;
  • the second information is at least one of the following: the TCI status associated with the first SRS resource, the TCI status associated with the second SRS resource, the first SRS resource, and the second SRS resource.
  • the network device can configure one or more grant configurations (Configured Grant Configuration) for the terminal device.
  • one or more configured grants on one BWP can be configured through RRC signaling.
  • one of the authorization configurations (the first authorization configuration) is taken as an example to introduce the subsequent solution.
  • the first configured grant is configured grant Type 1.
  • the network device when the first configuration authorization is configuration authorization type 1, the network device also includes the RRC uplink authorization configuration (rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant) in the RRC parameter configuration authorization configuration (configuredGrantConfig) for the first configuration authorization.
  • RRC uplink authorization configuration rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant
  • ConfiguredGrantConfig RRC parameter configuration authorization configuration
  • the first SRS resource is indicated by the RRC parameter SRS resource indicator (srs-ResourceIndicator) in the RRC parameter rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant corresponding to the first configuration grant.
  • the second SRS resource is indicated by the RRC parameter SRS resource indicator 2 (srs-ResourceIndicator2) in the RRC parameter rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant corresponding to the first configuration grant.
  • the network device may also configure one or more of the following information for the first configuration authorization (for example, through RRC signaling):
  • Frequency domain frequency hopping indication information such as intra-slot hopping (intra-slot hopping) and inter-slot hopping (inter-slot hopping);
  • DMRS Demodulation reference signal
  • Resource allocation indication information such as time domain, and/or frequency domain resource allocation
  • Precoding (precoding) indication information Precoding (precoding) indication information
  • Hybrid Automatic Repeat ReQuest (HARQ) process (HARQ process) indication information.
  • the information of the first authorization configuration is used, and some or all of the following information of pushch-Config in the RRC parameters are also used:
  • Uplink Control Information (UCI) range scaling of UCI-OnPUSCH on PUSCH.
  • the second PUSCH corresponds to the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource
  • the first SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the second The SRS resource is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states. Therefore, the SRS resource can be directly associated with the TCI status, reducing the association level and reducing the association complexity.
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the first SRS resource Associated with the first TCI state, the second SRS resource is associated with the second TCI state. Therefore, the correlation between the SRS resource set and the TCI status can be used to maintain the consistency of processing in different PUSCH modes and reduce the protocol complexity.
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the first SRS resource Associated with the second TCI state, the second SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state. Therefore, the correlation between the SRS resource set and the TCI status can be used to maintain the consistency of processing in different PUSCH modes and reduce the protocol complexity.
  • the terminal device determines the first TCI state, the first SRS resource, and the second SRS resource.
  • the TCI status and the second SRS resource determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the second PUSCH and the transmission of the second PUSCH.
  • the first SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the terminal device determines the uplink transmission corresponding to the second PUSCH according to the first TCI state and the first SRS resource. Spatial filter or spatial relationship and transmission of the second PUSCH.
  • the second PUSCH may be transmitted in M consecutive time slots; for another example, the second PUSCH may have M nominal repetitions. Biography (nominal repetitions)).
  • the first SRS resource corresponds to the first transmission of the second PUSCH (for example, the first slot among M consecutive slots, or the first retransmission among M nominal retransmissions)
  • the second SRS resource corresponds to the second transmission of the second PUSCH (for example, the second slot among M consecutive slots, or the second retransmission among M nominal retransmissions).
  • the first SRS resource and the second SRS resources are respectively applied to the 1st and 2nd transmission of the second PUSCH (for example, the 1st and 2nd slots in M consecutive slots, or the 1st and 2nd slots in M nominal retransmissions). 2 retransmissions), and the same mapping pattern is repeated in sequence until a total of M transmissions (the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots).
  • the corresponding SRS resources are: first SRS resource, second SRS resource, first SRS resource, and second SRS resource.
  • mappingMapping sequence mapping
  • mappingPattern mapping pattern
  • the first SRS resource Applied to the 1st and 2nd transmissions of the second PUSCH (such as the 1st and 2nd slots in M consecutive slots, or the 1st and 2nd retransmissions in M nominal retransmissions)
  • the second SRS resource is applied to the 3rd and 4th transmission of the second PUSCH (for example, the 3rd and 4th slots in M consecutive slots, or the 3rd and 4th times in M nominal retransmissions retransmission), and the same mapping pattern is repeated in sequence until a total of M transmissions (the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots).
  • the corresponding SRS resources are: first SRS resource, first SRS resource, second SRS resource, second SRS resource, first SRS resource, first SRS resource, and second SRS resource. , the second SRS resource.
  • the SRS resource determines the transmission of the second PUSCH.
  • the first SRS resource set corresponds to the RRC parameter srs-ResourceIndicator in the RRC parameter rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant corresponding to the first configuration grant
  • the second SRS resource set corresponds to the RRC parameter rrc corresponding to the first configuration grant.
  • the SRI indicated by the RRC parameter srs-ResourceIndicator in the RRC parameter rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant corresponding to the first configuration authorization corresponds to an SRS resource in the first SRS resource set
  • the RRC parameter in the RRC parameter rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant corresponding to the first configuration authorization corresponds to a certain SRS resource in the second SRS resource set.
  • the terminal device receives the thirteenth indication information sent by the network device, where the thirteenth indication information is used to indicate that in the second PUSCH single transmission, the terminal device receives the thirteenth indication information according to the first TCI state and The second TCI status determines the transmission of the second PUSCH. For example, according to the thirteenth indication information, in each PUSCH transmission in CG PUSCH type 1 (if there are multiple transmissions), the terminal device simultaneously determines the uplink corresponding to the second PUSCH based on the first TCI state and the second TCI state. Send spatial filters or spatial relations.
  • the thirteenth indication information can be carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE, DCI signaling.
  • the thirteenth indication information may be configured for BWP, that is, the configuration granularity of the thirteenth indication information is BWP.
  • the thirteenth indication information is for the first configuration authorization configuration, that is, the configuration granularity of the thirteenth indication information is the configuration authorization configuration.
  • the thirteenth indication information is configured through the RRC parameter configuredGrantConfig.
  • the terminal device receives the second DCI, where the second DCI is used to activate a third PUSCH, the third PUSCH is a PUSCH of CG type 2, and the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and/or the fourth SRS.
  • the third SRS resource is one SRS resource among the two SRS resources
  • the fourth SRS resource is the other SRS resource among the two SRS resources; and the terminal device can determine the third SRS resource according to the third information.
  • the network device can configure one or more grant configurations (Configured Grant Configuration) for the terminal device.
  • one or more configured grants on one BWP can be configured through RRC signaling.
  • one of the authorization configurations (the first authorization configuration) is taken as an example to introduce the subsequent solution.
  • the first configured grant is configured grant Type 2.
  • the network device does not include the RRC uplink authorization configuration (rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant) in the RRC parameter configuration authorization configuration (configuredGrantConfig) for the first configuration authorization.
  • the third SRS resource is indicated by the RRC parameter SRS resource indicator (srs-ResourceIndicator) in the RRC parameter rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant corresponding to the first configuration grant.
  • the fourth SRS resource is indicated by the RRC parameter SRS resource indicator 2 (srs-ResourceIndicator2) in the RRC parameter rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant corresponding to the first configuration grant.
  • the network device may also configure one or more of the following information for the first configuration authorization (for example, through RRC signaling):
  • Frequency domain frequency hopping indication information such as intra-slot hopping (intra-slot hopping) and inter-slot hopping (inter-slot hopping);
  • DMRS Demodulation reference signal
  • Resource allocation indication information such as time domain, and/or frequency domain resource allocation
  • Precoding (precoding) indication information Precoding (precoding) indication information
  • HARQ process indication information.
  • Embodiment 3 when DCI format 0_0 or DCI format 0_1 activates the first configuration authorization to transmit the third PUSCH, or when transmitting the third PUSCH corresponding to the first authorization configuration, the information of the first authorization configuration is also used. Use some or all of the following information from push-Config in the RRC parameters:
  • Embodiment 3 when DCI format 0_2 activates the first configuration authorization and thereby transmits the third PUSCH corresponding to the first configuration authorization, the information of the first authorization configuration is used, and the following part of push-Config in the RRC parameter is also used or All information:
  • Codebook Subset DCI-0-2 (codebookSubsetDCI-0-2);
  • UCI range on PUSCH scaling of UCI-OnPUSCH
  • resource allocation type 1 granularity DCI-0-2 resource allocationType1GranularityDCI-0-2.
  • the second DCI may be DCI format 0_0 or DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
  • the second DCI satisfies one or more of the following conditions:
  • CS-RNTI Configured Scheduling Radio Network Temporary Identity
  • G-CS-RNTI Group Configuration Scheduling Radio configured with parameter g-cs-RNTI Network Temporary Identity
  • CS-RNTI Configured Scheduling Radio Network Temporary Identity
  • G-CS-RNTI Group Configuration Scheduling Radio configured with parameter g-cs-RNTI Network Temporary Identity
  • the new data indication field in the second DCI is set to 0;
  • CG-DFI Configured Grant Downlink Feedback Information
  • the time domain resource allocation indication field in the second DCI indicates a row corresponding to a start length indicator value (Start and length indicator value, SLIV).
  • the provisions of some domains in the DCI that activate the first configuration authorization are as shown in Table 1.
  • DCI format 0_0/0_1/0_2 DCI format 1_0/1_2/4_1
  • DCI format 1_1/4_2 HARQ process number Set to all '0's Set to all '0's Set to all '0's RV Set to all '0's Set to all '0's Enabled transport blocks: set to all '0's
  • the provisions of some domains in the DCI that activate the first configuration authorization are as shown in Table 2.
  • DCI format 0_0/0_1/0_2 DCI format 1_0/1_2/4_1
  • DCI format 1_1/4_2 RV Set to all '0's Set to all '0's Enabled transport blocks: set to all '0's
  • the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and/or the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource in the second DCI. Indicates the domain is determined. Therefore, preset rules can be used to determine SRS resources based on the DCI fixed domain, reducing product implementation complexity.
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource.
  • the third PUSCH pair should be a third SRS resource;
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the fourth SRS resource
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI; or,
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI.
  • the second DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2
  • the SRS resource set indicator field in the second DCI indicates the first value (for example, codepoint is "00"
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to Third SRS resources.
  • the second DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2
  • the SRS resource set indicator field in the second DCI indicates the second value (for example, the codepoint is "01")
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to Fourth SRS resources.
  • the second DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2
  • the SRS resource set indicator field in the second DCI indicates the third value (for example, codepoint is "10"
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to The third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resource, where the third SRS resource is determined by the "SRS resource indicator” indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the "Second SRS resource indicator" indication field in the second DCI.
  • the second DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2
  • the SRS resource set indicator field in the second DCI indicates the fourth value (for example, codepoint is "11"
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to The third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resource
  • the fourth SRS resource is determined by the "SRS resource indicator” indication field in the second DCI
  • the third SRS resource is determined by the "Second SRS resource indicator” indication field in the second DCI.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the third PUSCH can be determined based on the SRS resource set indication field in the second DCI, thereby increasing the flexibility of the system.
  • the third PUSCH pair should be a third SRS resource;
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the fourth SRS resource
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI; or,
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI.
  • the second DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2
  • the SRS resource set indicator field in the second DCI indicates the first value (for example, codepoint is "00"
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to Third SRS resources.
  • the second DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2
  • the SRS resource set indicator field in the second DCI indicates the second value (for example, the codepoint is "01")
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to Fourth SRS resources.
  • the second DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2
  • the SRS resource set indicator field in the second DCI indicates the third value (for example, codepoint is "10"
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to The third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resource, where the third SRS resource is determined by the "SRS resource indicator” indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the "Second SRS resource indicator" indication field in the second DCI.
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to The third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resource, where the third SRS resource is determined by the "SRS resource indicator” indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the "Second SRS resource indicator” indication field in the second DCI.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the third PUSCH can be determined based on the SRS resource set indication field in the second DCI, thereby increasing the flexibility of the system.
  • the fourth SRS resource is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states. Therefore, the SRS resource can be directly associated with the TCI status, reducing the association level and reducing the association complexity.
  • the third SRS resource set belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the fourth SRS resource belongs to the second SRS resource set
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the third SRS resource Associated with the first TCI state, the fourth SRS resource is associated with the second TCI state. Therefore, the correlation between the SRS resource set and the TCI status can be used to maintain the consistency of processing in different PUSCH modes and reduce the protocol complexity.
  • the third SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the third SRS resource Associated with the second TCI state, the fourth SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state. Therefore, the correlation between the SRS resource set and the TCI status can be used to maintain the consistency of processing in different PUSCH modes and reduce the protocol complexity.
  • the terminal device determines the first TCI state, the third SRS resource, and the second SRS resource.
  • the TCI state and the fourth SRS resource determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the third PUSCH and the transmission of the third PUSCH.
  • the third SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the terminal device determines the uplink transmission spatial filter corresponding to the third PUSCH according to the first TCI state and the third SRS resource. Or spatial relationship and transmission of the third PUSCH.
  • the third PUSCH may be transmitted in M consecutive time slots; for another example, the third PUSCH may have M nominal repetitions. Biography (nominal repetitions)).
  • the SRS resource set indicator field in DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2 indicates the first value (for example, codepoint is "00")
  • the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used for M repeated transmissions of the third PUSCH.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field in DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2 indicates the second value (for example, codepoint is "01")
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for M repeated transmissions of the third PUSCH.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field in DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2 indicates the third value (for example, codepoint is "10") It can be divided into the following situations based on the value of M:
  • the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used for the first transmission of the third PUSCH (for example, the first slot among M consecutive slots, or the first slot among M nominal retransmissions). 1 retransmission), the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for the second transmission of the third PUSCH (for example, the second slot among M consecutive slots, or the second slot among M nominal retransmissions) 2 retransmissions).
  • the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used for the first transmission of the third PUSCH (for example, M The first slot among consecutive slots, or the first retransmission among M nominal retransmissions)
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for the second transmission of the third PUSCH (for example, M The second slot in consecutive slots, or the second retransmission in M nominal retransmissions)
  • the same mapping pattern is repeated in sequence until a total of M transmissions (the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots).
  • the corresponding SRS resource sets are: the first SRS resource set, the second SRS resource set, the first SRS resource set, and the second SRS resource set.
  • the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used for the 1st and 2nd times of the third PUSCH transmission (such as the 1st and 2nd slots among M consecutive slots, or the 1st and 2nd retransmissions among M nominal retransmissions), the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI status are used For the 3rd and 4th transmission of the third PUSCH (such as the 3rd and 4th slot in M consecutive slots, or the 3rd and 4th retransmission in M nominal retransmissions), subsequent The same mapping pattern is repeated in sequence until a total of M transmissions (the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots).
  • the corresponding SRS resource sets are: first SRS resource set, first SRS resource set, second SRS resource set, second SRS resource set, first SRS resource set, first SRS Resource set, second SRS resource set, second SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field in DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2 indicates the fourth value (for example, codepoint is "11") It can be divided into the following situations based on the value of M:
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for the first transmission of the third PUSCH (for example, the first slot among M consecutive slots, or the first slot among M nominal retransmissions). 1 retransmission), the first SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used for the second transmission of the third PUSCH (for example, the second slot among M consecutive slots, or the second slot among M nominal retransmissions) 2 retransmissions).
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for the first transmission of the third PUSCH, the first SRS resource set and The corresponding first TCI state is used for the second transmission of the third PUSCH, and the same mapping pattern is repeated in sequence until a total of M transmissions (the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots).
  • the corresponding SRS resource sets are: the second SRS resource set, the first SRS resource set, the second SRS resource set, and the first SRS resource set.
  • the second SRS resource set and the corresponding second TCI state are used for the first and second transmissions of the third PUSCH, the first The SRS resource set and the corresponding first TCI state are used for the third and fourth transmissions of the third PUSCH, and the same mapping pattern is repeated in sequence until a total of M transmissions (the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots).
  • the corresponding SRS resource sets are: the second SRS resource set, the second SRS resource set, the first SRS resource set, the first SRS resource set, the second SRS resource set, the second SRS Resource set, first SRS resource set, first SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resource determines the transmission of the third PUSCH.
  • the first SRS resource set corresponds to the "SRS resource indicator” indication field in the second DCI
  • the second SRS resource set corresponds to the "Second SRS resource indicator” indication field in the second DCI.
  • the SRI indicated by the "SRS resource indicator” indication field in the second DCI corresponds to a certain SRS resource in the first SRS resource set
  • the SRI indicated by the "Second SRS resource indicator” indication field in the second DCI corresponds to the second SRS resource.
  • the terminal device receives the fourteenth indication information sent by the network device, wherein the fourteenth indication information indicates that in the third PUSCH single transmission, the terminal device receives the first TCI state and the second The TCI status determines the transmission of the third PUSCH. For example, according to the fourteenth indication information, in each PUSCH transmission in CG PUSCH type 2 (if there are multiple transmissions), the terminal device simultaneously determines the uplink corresponding to the third PUSCH based on the first TCI state and the second TCI state. Send spatial filters or spatial relations.
  • the fourteenth indication information can be carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE, DCI signaling.
  • the fourteenth indication information is configured for BWP, that is, the configuration granularity of the fourteenth indication information is BWP.
  • the fourteenth indication information is configured for the first configuration authorization, that is, the configuration granularity of the fourteenth indication information is the configuration authorization configuration.
  • the fourteenth indication information is configured through the RRC parameter configuredGrantConfig.
  • the thirteenth indication information and the fourteenth indication information correspond to the same RRC parameter.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS resource set and/or the second SRS resource set according to the above solution, and the TCI status corresponding to each SRS resource set (for example, the first TCI status, and/or , the second TCI state) determines the uplink transmission.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS resource and/or the second SRS resource according to the above solution, and the TCI status corresponding to each SRS resource (for example, the first TCI status, and/or the second TCI status) determines uplink transmission.
  • the terminal device determines the third SRS resource and/or the fourth SRS resource according to the above solution, and the TCI state corresponding to each SRS resource (for example, the first TCI state, and/or the second TCI status) determines uplink transmission.
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 TCI states, that is, it is clear that The TCI status associated with the first SRS resource set and/or the second SRS resource set, so that the uplink transmission spatial filter corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set can be determined based on the first SRS resource set and its associated TCI status, or spatial relationship, and/or determine an uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the second SRS resource set based on the second SRS resource set and its associated TCI status.
  • some or all of the two SRS resources are associated with the TCI status among the K1 TCI statuses, that is, it is clear that some or all of the two SRS resources are associated with the TCI status.
  • the association relationship allows the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the SRS resource to be determined based on the SRS resource and its associated TCI status.
  • Figure 5 shows a schematic block diagram of a terminal device 300 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 300 includes:
  • Communication unit 310 configured to receive first indication information, the first indication information being used to indicate the first sounding reference signal SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set, and the uses of the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set. Both are used for physical uplink shared channel PUSCH based on codebook or non-codebook;
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 transmission configuration indication TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 TCI states
  • the first indication information Some or all of the two indicated SRS resources are associated with TCI states among the K1 TCI states
  • the K1 TCI states are currently activated TCI states corresponding to uplink transmission, and K1 is a positive integer.
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and/or the second SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and K1> In the case of 1, the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states; and/or,
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and/or the second SRS resource set is associated with the TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and the K1 TCI state only includes the In the case of a TCI state, both the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set are associated with the first TCI state; or, the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state, and the second SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state.
  • the resource collection is not associated with TCI status.
  • one of the two SRS resources is associated with One TCI state among the K1 TCI states is associated, and the other SRS resource among the two SRS resources is associated with another TCI state among the K1 TCI states;
  • the two SRS resources are both associated with one TCI state among the K1 TCI states. Association; or, one SRS resource of the two SRS resources is associated with the TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and the other SRS resource of the two SRS resources is not associated with the TCI state.
  • the first TCI state is determined based on the TCI state identifier in the K1 TCI states, and/or, the second TCI state is based on the TCI in the K1 TCI states.
  • Status ID OK when K1>1, the first TCI state is determined based on the TCI state identifier in the K1 TCI states, and/or, the second TCI state is based on the TCI in the K1 TCI states.
  • the first TCI state identifies the smallest TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and/or, the second TCI state identifies the largest TCI state among the K1 TCI states; or,
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the first TCI state is determined based on the position information of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information, and/or, the second TCI state is based on the K1 TCIs.
  • the status is determined by the location information in the second indication information;
  • the second indication information is indication information sent by the network device for at least indicating or activating a TCI state
  • the TCI states indicated or activated by the second indication information include at least the K1 TCI states.
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information.
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state that is the last of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information
  • the second TCI state is the last TCI state of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information.
  • the top TCI status is the TCI status.
  • the first TCI state is indicated by the network device through third indication information, and/or the second TCI state is indicated by the network device through fourth indication information.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among K1 TCI states, or the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is K1 The TCI state with the largest identifier among the TCI states, or the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information, or the third indication information
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state at the rear of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information;
  • the second indication information is indication information sent by the network device for at least indicating or activating a TCI state
  • the TCI states indicated or activated by the second indication information include at least the K1 TCI states.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among K1 TCI states, or the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is K1 The TCI state with the largest identifier among the TCI states, or the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information, or the fourth The indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the TCI state at the rear of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information;
  • the second indication information is indication information sent by the network device for at least indicating or activating a TCI state
  • the TCI states indicated or activated by the second indication information include at least the K1 TCI states.
  • the first TCI state is the K1 TCI state.
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states. ; and/or, in the case where the terminal device obtains the third indication information, or in the case where the network device is configured with the third indication information, the first TCI state is identified in the K1 TCI states. Minimal TCI status.
  • the second TCI state is the K1 TCI state.
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states. ; and/or, when the terminal device obtains the fourth indication information, or when the network device configures the fourth indication information, the second TCI state is identified in the K1 TCI states. Minimal TCI status.
  • the first TCI state when the third indication information is a first value, the first TCI state identifies the smallest TCI state among the K1 TCI states; and/or, when the third indication information is In the case of the second value, the first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states; or,
  • the first TCI state identifies the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states; and/or in the case where the third indication information is the second value Under this condition, the first TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the second TCI state identifies the smallest TCI state among the K1 TCI states; and/or, when the fourth indication information is In the case of the second value, the second TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states; or,
  • the second TCI state identifies the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states; and/or in the case where the fourth indication information is the second value , the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the third indication information is included in the configuration information of the first SRS resource set, and/or the fourth indication information is included in the configuration information of the second SRS resource set.
  • the configuration information of the first SRS resource set when the configuration information of the first SRS resource set includes the third indication information, the configuration information of the first SRS resource set does not include the SRS followUnifiedTCIstateSRS, or, the The configuration information of the first SRS resource set contains the disabled followUnifiedTCIstateSRS, or the terminal device ignores the followUnifiedTCIstateSRS in the configuration information of the first SRS resource set; and/or,
  • the configuration information of the second SRS resource set includes the fourth indication information
  • the configuration information of the second SRS resource set does not include followUnifiedTCIstateSRS, or the configuration information of the second SRS resource set includes followUnifiedTCIstateSRS. can followUnifiedTCIstateSRS, or the terminal device ignores followUnifiedTCIstateSRS in the configuration information of the second SRS resource set.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state, and/or the second SRS resource set corresponds to The uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship is determined based on the second TCI state; and/or,
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state and/or the first SRS resource set, and/or, with The uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the second SRS resource set is determined based on the second TCI state and/or the second SRS resource set.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state; or, the third The uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to an SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state, and the current PUSCH transmission does not consider the second SRS resource set; and/or,
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set is based on the first TCI state and/or the first SRS resource.
  • the set is determined, and/or the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state and the first SRS resource set, and the current PUSCH transmission does not consider the The second SRS resource collection.
  • the K1 TCI states belong to N TCI states
  • N TCI states are activated TCI states corresponding to uplink transmission, the N TCI states are configured or indicated by the network device, N is a positive integer, and K1 ⁇ N.
  • the K1 TCI states are indicated by the network device through fifth indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the K1 TCI states are K1 TCI states selected from the N TCI states in a first order.
  • the first order is an order from small to large TCI status identifiers, or the first order is an order from large to small TCI status identifiers.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the K1 TCI states are K1 TCI states selected in sequence according to the position order of the N TCI states in the second indication information;
  • the second indication information is indication information sent by the network device for at least indicating or activating a TCI state, and the TCI state indicated or activated by the second indication information at least includes the N TCI states.
  • the position order of the N TCI states in the second indication information is from front to back, or the position order of the N TCI states in the second indication information is from back to front. Order.
  • the fifth indication information is carried through one of the following: Radio Resource Control RRC signaling, Media Access Control Layer Control Unit MAC CE signaling, and Downlink Control Information DCI signaling.
  • the N TCI states are indicated by the network device through sixth indication information; or,
  • the N TCI states are indicated by the network device through the second indication information; or,
  • the N TCI states are determined from the TCI states indicated by the network device through the sixth indication information based on the second indication information;
  • the second indication information is indication information sent by the network device for at least indicating or activating a TCI state, and the TCI state indicated or activated by the second indication information at least includes the N TCI states.
  • the sixth indication information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling, and DCI signaling.
  • the second indication information is carried through first MAC CE signaling
  • the first MAC CE signaling also includes at least one of the following: serving cell indication information, downlink bandwidth part BWP indication information, uplink BWP indication information, one or more TCI quantity indication fields, one or more TCI type indication fields , one or more TCI status indication fields.
  • the terminal device 300 further includes a processing unit 320;
  • the communication unit 310 is also configured to receive a first DCI, where the first DCI is used to schedule the first PUSCH;
  • the processing unit 320 is configured to determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH according to the first information; or, determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH and the third PUSCH according to the first information. -PUSCH transmission;
  • the first information is at least one of the following: the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states, the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states, the first SRS resource set, and the second SRS resource set;
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state
  • both the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set are associated with the first TCI state; or, the first The SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state, and the second SRS resource set is not associated with the TCI state.
  • the processing unit 320 when K1>1, is specifically used to:
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH according to the preset TCI state in the first TCI state and the second TCI state; or,
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH is determined according to the TCI status indicated by the network device in the first TCI status and the second TCI status.
  • the processing unit 320 when K1>1, is specifically used to:
  • the first DCI is DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH and the transmission of the first PUSCH are determined.
  • the terminal device 300 further includes a processing unit 320;
  • the processing unit 320 is configured to determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the second PUSCH and the transmission of the second PUSCH according to the second information;
  • the second PUSCH is a PUSCH configured with grant CG type 1, the second PUSCH corresponds to the first SRS resource and/or the second SRS resource, the first SRS resource is one of the two SRS resources, and the The second SRS resource is the other SRS resource among the two SRS resources;
  • the second information is at least one of the following: the TCI status associated with the first SRS resource, the TCI status associated with the second SRS resource, the first SRS resource, and the second SRS resource.
  • the first SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource is associated with the The second TCI state association among the K1 TCI states
  • the first SRS resource belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the second SRS resource belongs to the second SRS resource set
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the first SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state.
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state.
  • Two SRS resources are associated with the second TCI state; or,
  • the first SRS resource belongs to the second SRS resource set
  • the second SRS resource belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the first SRS resource is associated with the second TCI state.
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state.
  • Two SRS resources are associated with the first TCI state.
  • the processing unit 320 is specifically used to:
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the second PUSCH and the transmission of the second PUSCH are determined.
  • the first SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the processing unit 320 is specifically used to:
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the second PUSCH and the transmission of the second PUSCH are determined.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the second PUSCH and the transmission of the second PUSCH or,
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the second PUSCH and the transmission of the second PUSCH are determined.
  • the terminal device 300 further includes a processing unit 320;
  • the communication unit 310 is also configured to receive a second DCI, wherein the second DCI is used to activate a third PUSCH.
  • the third PUSCH is a PUSCH of CG type 2.
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and/or the fourth SRS resources, the third SRS resource is one SRS resource among the two SRS resources, and the fourth SRS resource is the other SRS resource among the two SRS resources;
  • the processing unit 320 is configured to determine the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the third PUSCH and the transmission of the third PUSCH according to the third information;
  • the third information is at least one of the following: the TCI status associated with the third SRS resource, the TCI status associated with the fourth SRS resource, the third SRS resource, and the fourth SRS resource.
  • the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and/or the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI.
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource.
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resources
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the fourth SRS resource
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI; or,
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI.
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resources
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the fourth SRS resource
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI; or,
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI.
  • the third SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the fourth SRS resource is associated with the The second TCI state association among the K1 TCI states
  • the third SRS resource belongs to the first SRS resource set, the fourth SRS resource belongs to the second SRS resource set, and the first SRS resource set
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states, the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states, then the third SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state, and the third SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state.
  • Four SRS resources are associated with the second TCI state; or,
  • the third SRS resource belongs to the second SRS resource set, the fourth SRS resource belongs to the first SRS resource set, and the first SRS resource set
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the third SRS resource is associated with the second TCI state
  • the third SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state.
  • Four SRS resources are associated with the first TCI state.
  • the processing unit 320 is specifically used to:
  • the third SRS resource, the second TCI state and the fourth SRS resource, the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the third PUSCH and the transmission of the third PUSCH are determined.
  • the third SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the processing unit 320 is specifically used to:
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the third PUSCH and the transmission of the third PUSCH are determined.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the third PUSCH and the transmission of the third PUSCH are determined.
  • the communication unit 310 is also used to send first terminal capability information
  • the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports Z1 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports transmission configuration indication in DCI.
  • a code point in the domain activates or indicates at most Z1 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports Z1 unified TCI states on CG PUSCH.
  • Z1 is a positive integer, and Z1>1.
  • the first terminal capability information is reported according to at least one of the following granularities:
  • the first terminal capability information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling.
  • the communication unit 310 is also used to send second terminal capability information
  • the second terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports CG PUSCH.
  • the second terminal capability information is reported according to at least one of the following granularities:
  • the second terminal capability information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling.
  • the second terminal capability information and the first terminal capability information are transmitted through the same signaling, or the second terminal capability information and the first terminal capability information are transmitted through different signaling;
  • the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports Z1 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports transmission configuration indication in DCI.
  • a code point in the domain activates or indicates at most Z1 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports Z1 unified TCI states on CG PUSCH.
  • Z1 is a positive integer, and Z1>1.
  • the communication unit 310 is also used to send third terminal capability information
  • the third terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports Z2 unified TCI states for simultaneous uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the third terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports transmission configuration in DCI
  • a code point in the indication field activates or indicates at most Z2 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the third terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports Z2 unified TCI on CG PUSCH
  • the status is used for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission at the same time, where Z2 is a positive integer and Z2>1.
  • the third terminal capability information is reported according to at least one of the following granularities:
  • the third terminal capability information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling.
  • the configuration information of the first SRS resource set indicates tracking of a unified TCI state
  • the configuration information of the second SRS resource set indicates tracking of a unified TCI state
  • the TCI state among the K1 TCI states is a joint TCI state, or the TCI state among the K1 TCI states is an uplink TCI state.
  • the above-mentioned communication unit may be a communication interface or transceiver, or an input/output interface of a communication chip or a system on a chip.
  • the above-mentioned processing unit may be one or more processors.
  • terminal device 300 may correspond to the terminal device in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above and other operations and/or functions of each unit in the terminal device 300 are respectively to implement the method shown in Figure 5
  • the corresponding process of the terminal equipment in 200 will not be repeated here for the sake of simplicity.
  • Figure 7 shows a schematic block diagram of a network device 400 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 400 includes:
  • Communication unit 410 configured to send first indication information, the first indication information being used to indicate the first sounding reference signal SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set, and the uses of the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set. Both are used for physical uplink shared channel PUSCH based on codebook or non-codebook;
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 transmission configuration indication TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among K1 TCI states
  • the first indication information Some or all of the two indicated SRS resources are associated with TCI states among the K1 TCI states
  • the K1 TCI states are currently activated TCI states corresponding to uplink transmission, and K1 is a positive integer.
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and/or the second SRS resource set is associated with a TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and K1> In the case of 1, the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states; and/or,
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and/or the second SRS resource set is associated with the TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and the K1 TCI state only includes the In the case of a TCI state, both the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set are associated with the first TCI state; or, the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state, and the second SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state.
  • the resource collection is not associated with TCI status.
  • one of the two SRS resources is associated with One TCI state among the K1 TCI states is associated, and the other SRS resource among the two SRS resources is associated with another TCI state among the K1 TCI states;
  • the two SRS resources are both associated with one TCI state among the K1 TCI states. Association; or, one SRS resource of the two SRS resources is associated with the TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and the other SRS resource of the two SRS resources is not associated with the TCI state.
  • the first TCI state is determined based on the TCI state identifier in the K1 TCI states, and/or, the second TCI state is based on the TCI in the K1 TCI states.
  • Status ID OK when K1>1, the first TCI state is determined based on the TCI state identifier in the K1 TCI states, and/or, the second TCI state is based on the TCI in the K1 TCI states.
  • the first TCI state identifies the smallest TCI state among the K1 TCI states, and/or, the second TCI state identifies the largest TCI state among the K1 TCI states; or,
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the first TCI state is determined based on the position information of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information, and/or, the second TCI state is based on the K1 TCIs.
  • the status is determined by the location information in the second indication information;
  • the second indication information is at least indication information sent by the network device to indicate or activate a TCI state, and the TCI states indicated or activated by the second indication information include at least the K1 TCI states.
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information.
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state that is the last of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information
  • the second TCI state is the last TCI state of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information.
  • the top TCI status is the TCI status.
  • the first TCI state is indicated by the network device through third indication information, and/or the second TCI state is indicated by the network device through fourth indication information.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among K1 TCI states, or the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is K1 The TCI state with the largest identifier among the TCI states, or the third indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information, or the third indication information
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the first TCI state is the TCI state at the rear of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information;
  • the second indication information is at least indication information sent by the network device to indicate or activate a TCI state, and the TCI states indicated or activated by the second indication information include at least the K1 TCI states.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among K1 TCI states, or the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is K1 The TCI state with the largest identifier among the TCI states, or the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the TCI state with the highest position among the K1 TCI states in the second indication information, or the fourth The indication information is used to indicate that the second TCI state is the TCI state at the rear of the K1 TCI states in the second indication information;
  • the second indication information is at least indication information sent by the network device to indicate or activate a TCI state, and the TCI states indicated or activated by the second indication information include at least the K1 TCI states.
  • the first TCI state when the terminal device does not obtain the third indication information, or when the network device does not configure the third indication information, is one of the K1 TCI states. Identifies the smallest TCI state; and/or, in the case where the terminal device obtains the third indication information, or in the case where the network device is configured with the third indication information, the first TCI state is K1 The TCI state with the largest identifier among the TCI states; or,
  • the first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states; And/or, when the terminal device obtains the third indication information, or when the network device configures the third indication information, the first TCI state has the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states. TCI status.
  • the second TCI state when the terminal device does not obtain the fourth indication information, or when the network device does not configure the fourth indication information, the second TCI state is one of the K1 TCI states. Identifies the smallest TCI state; and/or, in the case that the terminal device obtains the fourth indication information, or in the case that the network device is configured with the fourth indication information, the second TCI state is K1 The TCI state with the largest identifier among the TCI states; or,
  • the second TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states; And/or, when the terminal device obtains the fourth indication information, or when the network device configures the fourth indication information, the second TCI state has the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states. TCI status.
  • the first TCI state when the third indication information is a first value, the first TCI state identifies the smallest TCI state among the K1 TCI states; and/or, when the third indication information is In the case of the second value, the first TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states; or,
  • the first TCI state identifies the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states; and/or in the case where the third indication information is the second value Under this condition, the first TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the second TCI state identifies the smallest TCI state among the K1 TCI states; and/or, when the fourth indication information is In the case of the second value, the second TCI state is the TCI state with the largest identifier among the K1 TCI states; or,
  • the second TCI state identifies the TCI state with the largest value among the K1 TCI states; and/or in the case where the fourth indication information is the second value , the second TCI state is the TCI state with the smallest identifier among the K1 TCI states.
  • the third indication information is included in the configuration information of the first SRS resource set, and/or the fourth indication information is included in the configuration information of the second SRS resource set.
  • the configuration information of the first SRS resource set when the configuration information of the first SRS resource set includes the third indication information, the configuration information of the first SRS resource set does not include the SRS followUnifiedTCIstateSRS, or, the The configuration information of the first SRS resource set contains disabled followUnifiedTCIstateSRS; and/or,
  • the configuration information of the second SRS resource set includes the fourth indication information
  • the configuration information of the second SRS resource set does not include followUnifiedTCIstateSRS, or the configuration information of the second SRS resource set includes followUnifiedTCIstateSRS. Can followUnifiedTCIstateSRS.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state, and/or the second SRS resource set corresponds to The uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship is determined based on the second TCI state; and/or,
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state and/or the first SRS resource set, and/or, with The uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the second SRS resource set is determined based on the second TCI state and/or the second SRS resource set.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state; or, the third The uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to an SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state, and the current PUSCH transmission does not consider the second SRS resource set; and/or,
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set is based on the first TCI state and/or the first SRS resource.
  • the set is determined, and/or the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the PUSCH associated with the first SRS resource set is determined based on the first TCI state and the first SRS resource set, and the current PUSCH transmission does not consider the The second SRS resource collection.
  • the K1 TCI states belong to N TCI states
  • N TCI states are activated TCI states corresponding to uplink transmission, the N TCI states are configured or indicated by the network device, N is a positive integer, and K1 ⁇ N.
  • the K1 TCI states are indicated by the network device through fifth indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the K1 TCI states are K1 TCI states selected from the N TCI states in a first order.
  • the first order is an order from small to large TCI status identifiers, or the first order is an order from large to small TCI status identifiers.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the K1 TCI states are K1 TCI states selected in sequence according to the position order of the N TCI states in the second indication information;
  • the second indication information is indication information sent by the network device for at least indicating or activating a TCI state, and the TCI state indicated or activated by the second indication information at least includes the N TCI states.
  • the position order of the N TCI states in the second indication information is from front to back, or the position order of the N TCI states in the second indication information is from back to front. Order.
  • the fifth indication information is carried through one of the following: Radio Resource Control RRC signaling, Media Access Control Layer Control Unit MAC CE signaling, and Downlink Control Information DCI signaling.
  • the N TCI states are indicated by the network device through sixth indication information; or,
  • the N TCI states are indicated by the network device through the second indication information; or,
  • the N TCI states are determined based on the second indication information from the TCI states indicated by the network device through the sixth indication information;
  • the second indication information is at least indication information sent by the network device to indicate or activate a TCI state, and the TCI state indicated or activated by the second indication information at least includes the N TCI states.
  • the sixth indication information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling, and DCI signaling.
  • the second indication information is carried through first MAC CE signaling
  • the first MAC CE signaling also includes at least one of the following: serving cell indication information, downlink bandwidth part BWP indication information, uplink BWP indication information, one or more TCI quantity indication fields, one or more TCI type indication fields , one or more TCI status indication fields.
  • the communication unit 410 is also configured to send a first DCI, where the first DCI is used to schedule the first PUSCH;
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH is determined based on the first information; or, the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH and the transmission of the first PUSCH are determined based on the first information. ;
  • the first information is at least one of the following: the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states, the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states, the first SRS resource set, and the second SRS resource set;
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state
  • both the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set are associated with the first TCI state; or, the first The SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state, and the second SRS resource set is not associated with the TCI state.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH is based on the first TCI state and the second TCI state.
  • the TCI status preset in is determined; or,
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH is based on the first TCI state and the second TCI state indicated by the network device. TCI status determined.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH and the transmission of the first PUSCH are based on The first TCI state, the first SRS resource set, the second TCI state and the second SRS resource set are determined.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH and the transmission of the first PUSCH are determined based on the first SRS resource set and the first TCI state; or,
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the first PUSCH and the transmission of the first PUSCH are determined based on the second SRS resource set and the first TCI state.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the second PUSCH and the transmission of the second PUSCH are determined based on the second information
  • the second PUSCH is a PUSCH configured with grant CG type 1, the second PUSCH corresponds to the first SRS resource and/or the second SRS resource, the first SRS resource is one of the two SRS resources, and the The second SRS resource is the other SRS resource among the two SRS resources;
  • the second information is at least one of the following: the TCI status associated with the first SRS resource, the TCI status associated with the second SRS resource, the first SRS resource, and the second SRS resource.
  • the first SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource is associated with the The second TCI state association among the K1 TCI states
  • the first SRS resource belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the second SRS resource belongs to the second SRS resource set
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the first SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state.
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state.
  • Two SRS resources are associated with the second TCI state; or,
  • the first SRS resource belongs to the second SRS resource set
  • the second SRS resource belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the first SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the first SRS resource is associated with the second TCI state.
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state.
  • Two SRS resources are associated with the first TCI state.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the second PUSCH and the transmission of the second PUSCH are based on the first TCI state, the first SRS resource, the second TCI state and the second SRS Resources determined.
  • the first SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the second PUSCH and the transmission of the second PUSCH are determined based on the first TCI state and the first SRS resource.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the second PUSCH and the transmission of the second PUSCH are based on the second PUSCH.
  • the communication unit 410 is also used to send a second DCI, where the second DCI is used to activate a third PUSCH.
  • the third PUSCH is a PUSCH of CG type 2, and the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS. resources and/or a fourth SRS resource, the third SRS resource is one SRS resource among the two SRS resources, and the fourth SRS resource is the other SRS resource among the two SRS resources;
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the third PUSCH and the transmission of the third PUSCH are determined based on the third information
  • the third information is at least one of the following: the TCI status associated with the third SRS resource, the TCI status associated with the fourth SRS resource, the third SRS resource, and the fourth SRS resource.
  • the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and/or the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI.
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource.
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resources
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the fourth SRS resource
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI; or,
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI.
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resources
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the fourth SRS resource
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI; or,
  • the third PUSCH corresponds to the third SRS resource and the fourth SRS resources, wherein the third SRS resource is determined by the first SRS resource indication field in the second DCI, and the fourth SRS resource is determined by the second SRS resource indication field in the second DCI.
  • the third SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the fourth SRS resource is associated with the The second TCI state association among the K1 TCI states
  • the third SRS resource belongs to the first SRS resource set, the fourth SRS resource belongs to the second SRS resource set, and the first SRS resource set
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states, the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states, then the third SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state, and the third SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state.
  • Four SRS resources are associated with the second TCI state; or,
  • the third SRS resource belongs to the second SRS resource set, the fourth SRS resource belongs to the first SRS resource set, and the first SRS resource set
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the second SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state among the K1 TCI states
  • the third SRS resource is associated with the second TCI state
  • the third SRS resource set is associated with the second TCI state.
  • Four SRS resources are associated with the first TCI state.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the third PUSCH and the transmission of the third PUSCH are based on the first TCI state, the third SRS resource, the second TCI state and the fourth SRS Resources determined.
  • the third SRS resource is associated with the first TCI state among the K1 TCI states.
  • the uplink transmission spatial filter or spatial relationship corresponding to the third PUSCH and the transmission of the third PUSCH are determined based on the first TCI state and the third SRS resource.
  • the communication unit 410 is also used to receive the first terminal capability information
  • the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports Z1 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports the transmission configuration indication field in the DCI.
  • One code point activates or indicates at most Z1 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports Z1 unified TCI states on CG PUSCH for uplink transmission. Or uplink repeated transmission, where Z1 is a positive integer and Z1>1.
  • the first terminal capability information is reported according to at least one of the following granularities:
  • the first terminal capability information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling.
  • the communication unit 410 is also used to receive second terminal capability information
  • the second terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports CG PUSCH.
  • the second terminal capability information is reported according to at least one of the following granularities:
  • the second terminal capability information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling.
  • the second terminal capability information and the first terminal capability information are transmitted through the same signaling, or the second terminal capability information and the first terminal capability information are transmitted through different signaling;
  • the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports Z1 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports transmission configuration indication in DCI.
  • a code point in the domain activates or indicates at most Z1 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the first terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports Z1 unified TCI states on CG PUSCH.
  • Z1 is a positive integer, and Z1>1.
  • the communication unit 410 is also used to receive third terminal capability information
  • the third terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports Z2 unified TCI states for simultaneous uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, or the third terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports the transmission configuration indication field in DCI.
  • One code point activates or indicates at most Z2 unified TCI states for uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission at the same time, or the third terminal capability information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports Z2 unified TCI states for simultaneous use on CG PUSCH In uplink transmission or uplink repeated transmission, Z2 is a positive integer, and Z2>1.
  • the third terminal capability information is reported according to at least one of the following granularities:
  • the third terminal capability information is carried through one of the following: RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling.
  • the configuration information of the first SRS resource set indicates tracking of a unified TCI state
  • the configuration information of the second SRS resource set indicates tracking of a unified TCI state
  • the TCI state among the K1 TCI states is a joint TCI state, or the TCI state among the K1 TCI states is an uplink TCI state.
  • the above-mentioned communication unit may be a communication interface or transceiver, or an input/output interface of a communication chip or a system on a chip.
  • the above-mentioned processing unit may be one or more processors.
  • network device 400 may correspond to the network device in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above and other operations and/or functions of each unit in the network device 400 are respectively to implement the method shown in Figure 5
  • the corresponding process of the network equipment in 200 will not be repeated here for the sake of simplicity.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 500 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 500 shown in Figure 8 includes a processor 510.
  • the processor 510 can call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • communication device 500 may also include memory 520 .
  • the processor 510 can call and run the computer program from the memory 520 to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 520 may be a separate device independent of the processor 510 , or may be integrated into the processor 510 .
  • the communication device 500 may also include a transceiver 530, and the processor 510 may control the transceiver 530 to communicate with other devices, specifically, may send information or data to other devices, or Receive information or data from other devices.
  • the transceiver 530 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 530 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
  • the processor 510 can implement the function of a processing unit in a terminal device, or the processor 510 can implement the function of a processing unit in a network device. For the sake of brevity, details will not be described here.
  • the transceiver 530 can implement the function of the communication unit in the terminal device, which will not be described again for the sake of brevity.
  • the transceiver 530 can implement the function of a communication unit in a network device. For the sake of brevity, the details will not be described again.
  • the communication device 500 can be specifically a network device according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 500 can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, this is not mentioned here. Again.
  • the communication device 500 can be a terminal device according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 500 can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, this is not mentioned here. Again.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic structural diagram of the device according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 600 shown in Figure 9 includes a processor 610.
  • the processor 610 can call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 600 may also include a memory 620 .
  • the processor 610 can call and run the computer program from the memory 620 to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 620 may be a separate device independent of the processor 610 , or may be integrated into the processor 610 .
  • the device 600 may also include an input interface 630.
  • the processor 610 can control the input interface 630 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips. Alternatively, processor 610 may be located on-chip or off-chip.
  • the processor 610 can implement the function of a processing unit in a terminal device, or the processor 610 can implement the function of a processing unit in a network device. For the sake of brevity, details will not be described again here.
  • the input interface 630 may implement the function of a communication unit in a terminal device, or the input interface 630 may implement the function of a communication unit in a network device.
  • the device 600 may also include an output interface 640.
  • the processor 610 can control the output interface 640 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can output information or data to other devices or chips. Alternatively, processor 610 may be located on-chip or off-chip.
  • the output interface 640 may implement the function of a communication unit in a terminal device, or the output interface 640 may implement the function of a communication unit in a network device.
  • the device can be applied to the network device in the embodiment of the present application, and the device can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, the details are not repeated here.
  • the device can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the device can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, the details will not be described again.
  • the devices mentioned in the embodiments of this application may also be chips.
  • it can be a system-on-a-chip, a system-on-a-chip, a system-on-a-chip or a system-on-a-chip, etc.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system 700 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10 , the communication system 700 includes a terminal device 710 and a network device 720 .
  • the terminal device 710 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the terminal device in the above method
  • the network device 720 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the network device in the above method.
  • the terminal device 710 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the terminal device in the above method
  • the network device 720 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the network device in the above method.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip and has signal processing capabilities.
  • each step of the above method embodiment can be completed through an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other available processors.
  • DSP Digital Signal Processor
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor, etc.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application can be directly implemented by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other mature storage media in this field.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double Data Rate SDRAM DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced SDRAM ESDRAM
  • Synchlink DRAM SLDRAM
  • Direct Rambus RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application can also be a static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), a dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), Synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection Dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM) and so on. That is, memories in embodiments of the present application are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium for storing computer programs.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the network device in the embodiment of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of simplicity, I won’t go into details here.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of simplicity, I won’t go into details here.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, including computer program instructions.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the network equipment in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network equipment in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For simplicity, in This will not be described again.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application. For simplicity, in This will not be described again.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program.
  • the computer program can be applied to the network equipment in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program When the computer program is run on the computer, it causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network equipment in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program For the sake of brevity, no further details will be given here.
  • the computer program can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program When the computer program is run on the computer, it causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program For the sake of brevity, no further details will be given here.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of the devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请实施例提供了一种无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备,其中,该无线通信的方法,包括:终端设备接收第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合的用途均为用于基于码本或非码本的PUSCH;其中,该第一SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;或者,该第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;其中,该K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前激活的TCI状态,K1为正整数。

Description

无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备 技术领域
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备。
背景技术
在一些场景中,引入了多天线面板(panel)的物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel,PUSCH)重复传输,此场景下,如何配置和指示传输配置指示(Transmission Configuration Indicator,TCI),是一个需要解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供了一种无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备,在多panel的PUSCH重复传输场景下,明确了SRS资源集合与TCI状态的关联关系,从而可以基于SRS资源集合及其关联的TCI状态,确定与SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系;或者,在多panel的PUSCH重复传输场景下,明确了SRS资源与TCI状态的关联关系,从而可以基于SRS资源及其关联的TCI状态,确定与SRS资源关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
第一方面,提供了一种无线通信的方法,应用于终端设备,该方法包括:
接收第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合的用途均为用于基于码本或非码本的PUSCH;
其中,该第一SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;或者,该第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;
其中,该K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前激活的TCI状态,K1为正整数。
第二方面,提供了一种无线通信的方法,应用于网络设备,该方法包括:
发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合的用途均为用于基于码本或非码本的PUSCH;
其中,该第一SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;或者,该第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;
其中,该K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前激活的TCI状态,K1为正整数。
第三方面,提供了一种终端设备,用于执行上述第一方面中的方法。
具体地,该终端设备包括用于执行上述第一方面中的方法的功能模块。
第四方面,提供了一种网络设备,用于执行上述第二方面中的方法。
具体地,该网络设备包括用于执行上述第二方面中的方法的功能模块。
第五方面,提供了一种终端设备,包括处理器和存储器;该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序,使得该终端设备执行上述第一方面中的方法。
第六方面,提供了一种网络设备,包括处理器和存储器;该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序,使得该网络设备执行上述第二方面中的方法。
第七方面,提供了一种装置,用于实现上述第一方面至第二方面中的任一方面中的方法。
具体地,该装置包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有该装置的设备执行如上述第一方面至第二方面中的任一方面中的方法。
第八方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面中的任一方面中的方法。
第九方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,所述计算机程序指令使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面中的任一方面中的方法。
第十方面,提供了一种计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面中的任一方面中的方法。
通过上述技术方案,第一SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,也即,明确了第一SRS资源集合和/或第二SRS资源集合关联的TCI状态,从而可以基于第一SRS资源集合及其关联的TCI状态确定与第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系,和/或,基于第二SRS资源集合及其关联的TCI状态确定与第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
或者,第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI 状态关联,也即,明确了两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与TCI状态的关联关系,从而可以基于SRS资源及其关联的TCI状态,确定与SRS资源关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例应用的一种通信系统架构的示意性图。
图2是本申请实施例应用的一种多TRP传输的示意性图。
图3是本申请实施例应用的一种多波束传输的示意性图。
图4是本申请实施例应用的一种PDSCH的TCI状态配置方法的示意性图。
图5是根据本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信的方法的示意性交互流程图。
图6是根据本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的示意性框图。
图7是根据本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的示意性框图。
图8是根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备的示意性框图。
图9是根据本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意性框图。
图10是根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。针对本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service,GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、先进的长期演进(Advanced long term evolution,LTE-A)系统、新无线(New Radio,NR)系统、NR系统的演进系统、非授权频谱上的LTE(LTE-based access to unlicensed spectrum,LTE-U)系统、非授权频谱上的NR(NR-based access to unlicensed spectrum,NR-U)系统、非地面通信网络(Non-Terrestrial Networks,NTN)系统、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Networks,WLAN)、物联网(internet of things,IoT)、无线保真(Wireless Fidelity,WiFi)、第五代通信(5th-Generation,5G)系统、第六代通信(6th-Generation,6G)系统或其他通信系统等。
通常来说,传统的通信系统支持的连接数有限,也易于实现,然而,随着通信技术的发展,移动通信系统将不仅支持传统的通信,还将支持例如,设备到设备(Device to Device,D2D)通信,机器到机器(Machine to Machine,M2M)通信,机器类型通信(Machine Type Communication,MTC),车辆间(Vehicle to Vehicle,V2V)通信,侧行(sidelink,SL)通信,车联网(Vehicle to everything,V2X)通信等,本申请实施例也可以应用于这些通信系统。
在一些实施例中,本申请实施例中的通信系统可以应用于载波聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)场景,也可以应用于双连接(Dual Connectivity,DC)场景,还可以应用于独立(Standalone,SA)布网场景,或者应用于非独立(Non-Standalone,NSA)布网场景。
在一些实施例中,本申请实施例中的通信系统可以应用于非授权频谱,其中,非授权频谱也可以认为是共享频谱;或者,本申请实施例中的通信系统也可以应用于授权频谱,其中,授权频谱也可以认为是非共享频谱。
在一些实施例中,本申请实施例中的通信系统可以应用于FR1频段(对应频段范围410MHz到7.125GHz),也可以应用于FR2频段(对应频段范围24.25GHz到52.6GHz),还可以应用于新的频段例如对应52.6GHz到71GHz频段范围或对应71GHz到114.25GHz频段范围的高频频段。
本申请实施例结合网络设备和终端设备描述了各个实施例,其中,终端设备也可以称为用户设备(User Equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置等。
终端设备可以是WLAN中的站点(STATION,ST),可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)设备、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、下一代通信系统例如NR网络中的终端设备,或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)网络中的终端设备等。
在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持、穿戴或车载;也可以 部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。
在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以是手机(Mobile Phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(Virtual Reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(Augmented Reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端设备、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端设备、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端设备、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端设备、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端设备、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端设备或智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端设备、车载通信设备、无线通信芯片/专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)/系统级芯片(System on Chip,SoC)等。
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。
在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以是用于与移动设备通信的设备,网络设备可以是WLAN中的接入点(Access Point,AP),GSM或CDMA中的基站(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是WCDMA中的基站(NodeB,NB),还可以是LTE中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),或者中继站或接入点,或者车载设备、可穿戴设备以及NR网络中的网络设备或者基站(gNB)或者发送接收点(Transmission Reception Point,TRP),或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备或者NTN网络中的网络设备等。
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以具有移动特性,例如网络设备可以为移动的设备。在一些实施例中,网络设备可以为卫星、气球站。例如,卫星可以为低地球轨道(low earth orbit,LEO)卫星、中地球轨道(medium earth orbit,MEO)卫星、地球同步轨道(geostationary earth orbit,GEO)卫星、高椭圆轨道(High Elliptical Orbit,HEO)卫星等。在一些实施例中,网络设备还可以为设置在陆地、水域等位置的基站。
在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以为小区提供服务,终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与网络设备进行通信,该小区可以是网络设备(例如基站)对应的小区,小区可以属于宏基站,也可以属于小小区(Small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(Metro cell)、微小区(Micro cell)、微微小区(Pico cell)、毫微微小区(Femto cell)等,这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。
示例性的,本申请实施例应用的通信系统100如图1所示。该通信系统100可以包括网络设备110,网络设备110可以是与终端设备120(或称为通信终端、终端)通信的设备。网络设备110可以为特定的地理区域提供通信覆盖,并且可以与位于该覆盖区域内的终端设备进行通信。
图1示例性地示出了一个网络设备和两个终端设备,在一些实施例中,该通信系统100可以包括多个网络设备并且每个网络设备的覆盖范围内可以包括其它数量的终端设备,本申请实施例对此不做限定。
在一些实施例中,该通信系统100还可以包括网络控制器、移动管理实体等其他网络实体,本申请实施例对此不作限定。
应理解,本申请实施例中网络/系统中具有通信功能的设备可称为通信设备。以图1示出的通信系统100为例,通信设备可包括具有通信功能的网络设备110和终端设备120,网络设备110和终端设备120可以为上文所述的具体设备,此处不再赘述;通信设备还可包括通信系统100中的其他设备,例如网络控制器、移动管理实体等其他网络实体,本申请实施例中对此不做限定。
应理解,本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
应理解,本文涉及第一通信设备和第二通信设备,第一通信设备可以是终端设备,例如手机,机器设施,用户前端设备(Customer Premise Equipment,CPE),工业设备,车辆等;第二通信设备可以是第一通信设备的对端通信设备,例如网络设备,手机,工业设备,车辆等。在本申请实施例中,第一通信设备可以是终端设备,且第二通信设备可以网络设备(即上行通信或下行通信);或者,第一通信设备可以是第一终端,且第二通信设备可以第二终端(即侧行通信)。
本申请的实施方式部分使用的术语仅用于对本申请的具体实施例进行解释,而非旨在限定本申请。本申请的说明书和权利要求书及所述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”和“第四”等是用于区别不同对象,而不是用于描述特定顺序。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及它们任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。
应理解,在本申请的实施例中提到的“指示”可以是直接指示,也可以是间接指示,还可以是表示具有关联关系。举例说明,A指示B,可以表示A直接指示B,例如B可以通过A获取;也可以表示A间接指示B,例如A指示C,B可以通过C获取;还可以表示A和B之间具有关联关系。
在本申请实施例的描述中,术语“对应”可表示两者之间具有直接对应或间接对应的关系,也可以表示两者之间具有关联关系,也可以是指示与被指示、配置与被配置等关系。
本申请实施例中,“预定义”或“预配置”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。比如预定义可以是指协议中定义的。
本申请实施例中,所述“协议”可以指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以是对现有LTE协议、NR协议、Wi-Fi协议或者与之相关的其它通信系统相关的协议的演进,本申请不对协议类型进行限定。
为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案,以下通过具体实施例详述本申请的技术方案。以下相关技术作为可选方案与本申请实施例的技术方案可以进行任意结合,其均属于本申请实施例的保护范围。本申请实施例包括以下内容中的至少部分内容。
为便于更好的理解本申请实施例,对本申请相关的多波束系统进行说明。
NR系统或5G系统的设计目标包括高频段(例如6GHz以上的频段)的大带宽通信。当工作频率变高时,传输过程中的路径损耗会增大,从而影响高频系统的覆盖能力。为了能够有效地保证高频段NR系统的覆盖,一种有效的技术方案便是基于大规模(Massive)天线阵列(如多输入多输出(Multiple Input Multiple Output,MIMO))采用多波束(multiple beam)(或混合波束(hybrid beam))技术来提高覆盖能力。
在典型系统中,一个小区(扇区)使用一个较宽的波束(beam)来覆盖整个小区。因此在每个时刻,小区覆盖范围内UE都有机会获得系统分配的传输资源。
NR系统或5G系统的多波束(Multi-beam)系统通过不同的beam来覆盖整个小区,即每个beam覆盖一个较小的范围,通过时间上的扫描(sweeping)来实现多个beam覆盖整个小区的效果。目前不同的beam通过上面承载的不同信号来进行识别。
一些不同beam上传输不同的同步信号块(Synchronization Signal Block,SSB),UE可以通过不同的SSB来分辨出不同的beam。SSB也可以称为同步信号/物理广播信道块(Synchronization Signal/Physical Broadcast Channel block,SS/PBCH block)。
一些不同的beam上传输不同的信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal,CSI-RS)信号,UE通过CSI-RS信号/CSI-RS资源来识别出不同的beam。
在一个多波束(Multi-beam)系统中,物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH)和物理下行共享信道(Physical Downlink Shared Channel,PDSCH)可以通过不同的下行发送波束来传输。
对于6G以下系统,UE侧一般没有模拟波束,因此采用全向天线(或者接近全向的天线)来接收基站不同下行发送波束发送的信号。
对于毫米波系统,UE侧可能会有模拟波束,需要使用对应的下行接收波束去接收对应的下行发送波束发送的信号。此时,需要相应的波束指示信息(beam indication)来协助UE确定网络侧的发送波束相关信息,或者UE侧对应的接收波束相关信息。
在NR协议中,波束指示信息不是直接指示波束本身,而是通过信号之间的准共址(Quasi-co-located,QCL)准共址类型(如QCL类型D(QCL-TypeD))来进行指示。在UE侧,确定接收相应的信道/信号,也是基于QCL准共址假设。其中QCL准共址假设是通过TCI状态(TCI-state)来指示的,即网络通过相关信令(无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC),和/或,媒体接入控制层控制单元(Media Access Control Control Element,MAC CE),和/或,下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI))来配置和/或指示对的传输配置指示(Transmission Configuration Indicator,TCI)状态。
为便于更好的理解本申请实施例,对本申请相关的多发送接收点(Transmission Reception Point,TRP)/天线面板(panel)/波束(beam)传输进行说明。
多TRP(Multiple TRP,mTRP或M-TRP)传输,指的是在同一个载波上,多个TRP可以同时和某个终端进行通信。由于在NR系统中,多个TRP传输,或者多个panel或者多个beam同时和一个 终端进行传输,可以采用相同的方案,因此在描述中,常常不加以区分(例如称为多TRP传输,mTRP传输,或者M-TRP传输),或者表述为多个TRP/panel/beam传输。
多个TRP或者多个天线面板(Antenna panels)或者多个beam同时给UE传输下行数据的方案支持下面两大类方案:
方案1:基于单PDCCH的方案(single-PDCCH based scheme),UE只检测一个PDCCH,在此控制信道PDCCH检测得到的一个DCI指示多个TRP/panel/beam上同时传输的数据的相关指示信息(从协议层面看不到是多个TRP/panel/beam,只能看到一次传输需要对应多个TCI-state,即通过多个TCI-state来隐式地支持多个TRP/panel/beam传输)。
方案2:基于多PDCCH的方案(multiple-PDCCH based scheme),UE接收来自不同的TRP/panel/beam上的不同的PDCCH,每个控制信道PDCCH上检测得到的DCI指示一个对应的数据传输的相关指示信息(从协议层面看不到是多个TRP/panel/beam,只能看到调度数据的DCI对应的控制资源集(Control Resource Set,CORESET)可能会关联到不同的CORESET资源池编号(CORESET pool index),即对应不同的CORESET资源池编号(pool index),即通过多个不同的CORESET pool index来隐式地支持多个TRP/panel/beam传输)。
具体的,多个TRP传输可以如图2所示,多个波束(beam)传输可以如图3所示。
对于方案1,UE只需要检测一个PDCCH,因此控制信道检测复杂度可能会低于方案2。方案1需要在不同的panel/TRP/beam之间能够快速交互信息。
对于方案2,则UE需要在同一个载波上同时去检测多个PDCCH,复杂度可能会有所增加,但是灵活性和鲁棒性可能会改善。
方案2可能应用的场景包括以下至少之一:
S1-1:多个TRP属于同一个小区,TRP之间的连接(backhaul)是理想的(即可以快速进行信息交互,动态信息交互);
S1-2:多个TRP属于同一个小区,TRP之间的连接(backhaul)是非理想的(即TRP之间无法快速交互信息,只能进行相对较慢的数据交互);
S1-3:多个TRP属于不同的小区,TRP之间的连接(backhaul)是理想的;
S1-4:多个TRP属于不同的小区,TRP之间的连接(backhaul)是非理想的;
S2-1,S2-2,S2-3,S2-4:把上面的TRP对应的换成beam,则可以对应的得到四个multi-beam的应用场景。
方案1一般认为只适用于理想backhaul的场景(即S1-1,S1-3)。
在版本16(release16,R16)中,支持了下行数据传输的多TRP传输。在版本17(release17,R17)中,支持了物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH),物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel,PUSCH),物理上行控制信道(Physical Uplink Control Channel,PUCCH)的多TRP传输,以增加相应信道传输的可靠性。
PUSCH在传输给两个TRP时采用的探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)资源及码本传输时采用的预编码矩阵可能存在不同以分别匹配不同TRP的信道状态,因此单DCI调度(针对DCI动态调度的PUSCH)中支持通过一个DCI指示两个SRS资源指示(SRS resource indicator,SRI)/发送预编码矩阵指示(Transmit Precoding Matrix Indicator,TPMI),即基于两个独立的SRI域和两个独立的TPMI域来指示2个TRP对应的PUSCH。
区别于动态调度PUSCH(例如每次PUSCH使用DCI来动态调度),配置授权(Configured grant,CG)PUSCH(即不需要动态调度,不需要DCI来动态调度)的一些参数由RRC信令配置,而不是由DCI动态指示。NR中支持类型1 CG PUSCH(Type1 CG PUSCH)和类型2 CG PUSCH(Type2 CG PUSCH),其中,Type1 CG PUSCH由RRC半静态配置包括时频域资源,解调参考信号(Demodulation Reference Signal,DMRS),开环功控,调制编码方案(Modulation and Coding Scheme,MCS)等所有PUSCH传输时需要的参数,Type2 CG PUSCH则由RRC配置部分半静态参数包括时域资源的周期,功控,重复次数等,由DCI进行激活并在同一个DCI中指示时频资源,DMRS,MCS等参数。R17中对这两种CG PUSCH都进行了基于多TRP的增强。R17中规定在CG配置(ConfiguredGrantConfig)中增加一组P0-PUSCH-阿尔法(P0-PUSCH-Alpha)和使用的功率控制回路(powerControlLoopToUse)用于第二个TRP的功率控制,对于Type2 CG PUSCH,原有的第一组功控值关联到第一个SRS资源集,第二组值关联到第二个SRS资源集,使用第一组功控或第二组功控或使用第一和第二组功控取决于DCI中新增加的用以指示单TRP和多TRP动态切换的2比特域。对于Type1 CG PUSCH,在RRC配置上行授权(rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant)中增加一组路径损耗参考索引(pathlossReferenceIndex)域,SRS资源指示(srs-ResourceIndicator)域,预编码和层数(precodingAndNumberOfLayers)域用 于指示第二个TRP对应的路损参考信号,SRI和TPMI。需要强调的是,与DCI信令对开销要求较高不同,RRC信令对开销相对要求较低,因此通过RRC指示的与第二个SRS资源集关联的srs-ResourceIndicator域和precodingAndNumberOfLayers域与第一个SRS资源集关联的srs-ResourceIndicator域和precodingAndNumberOfLayers域大小所占用的比特数相同。
需要说明的是,配置授权(CG)也可以称之为:免调度或免动态调度。
需要注意的是:针对多TRP系统,上面讨论的传输方案都是针对在同一个载波的情况下。例如针对multiple-PDCCH based scheme,终端是在同一个载波上检测多个DCI(现有协议支持2个),其中每个DCI可以调度对应的PDSCH,多个PDSCH也是在同一个载波上,或者同一个小区。对于上行的多TRP传输也是一样,针对的是同一个载波上的传输。
为便于更好的理解本申请实施例,对本申请相关的TCI state进行说明。
终端在进行信号接收时,为了提高接收性能,可以利用数据传输所对应的传输环境的特性来改进接收算法。例如可以利用信道的统计特性来优化信道估计器的设计和参数。在NR系统中,数据传输所对应的这些特性通过准共址(Quasi-co-located,QCL)信息(QCL-Info)来表示。
下行传输如果来自不同的TRP/panel/beam,则数据传输所对应的传输环境的特性可能也会有变化,因此在NR系统中,网络侧在传输下行控制信道或数据信道,会通过TCI状态(TCI state)将对应的QCL状态信息指示给终端。
一个TCI状态可以包含如下配置:
TCI状态标识(Identity,ID),用于标识一个TCI状态;
QCL信息1;
QCL信息2(可选)。
其中,一个QCL信息又包含如下信息:
QCL类型配置,可以是QCL type A,QCL type B,QCL type C或QCL type D中的一个;
QCL参考信号配置,包括参考信号所在的小区ID,带宽部分(Band Width Part,BWP)ID以及参考信号的标识(可以是CSI-RS资源ID或SSB索引)。
其中,如果QCL信息1和QCL信息2都配置了,至少一个QCL信息的QCL类型必须为typeA,typeB,typeC中的一个,另一个QCL信息(如果配置)的QCL类型必须为QCL type D。
其中,不同QCL类型配置的定义如下:
'QCL-TypeA':{多普勒频移(Doppler shift),多普勒扩展(Doppler spread),平均时延(average delay),延时扩展(delay spread)};
'QCL-TypeB':{多普勒频移(Doppler shift),多普勒扩展(Doppler spread)};
'QCL-TypeC':{多普勒频移(Doppler shift),平均时延(average delay)};
'QCL-TypeD':{空间接收参数(Spatial Rx parameter)}。
具体例如,TCI状态的语义字段可以如下所述。
Figure PCTCN2022110843-appb-000001
在NR系统中,网络侧可以为下行信号或下行信道指示相应的TCI状态。
如果网络侧通过TCI状态配置目标下行信道或目标下行信号的QCL参考信号为参考SSB或参考CSI-RS资源,且QCL类型配置为typeA,typeB或typeC,则终端可以假设所述目标下行信号与所述参考SSB或参考CSI-RS资源的大尺度参数是相同的,所述大尺度参数通过QCL类型配置来确定。
类似的,如果网络侧通过TCI状态配置目标下行信道或下行信号的QCL参考信号为参考SSB或参考CSI-RS资源,且QCL类型配置为typeD,则终端可以采用与接收所述参考SSB或参考CSI-RS资源相同的接收波束(即Spatial Rx parameter),来接收所述目标下行信号。通常的,目标下行信道(或下行信号)与它的参考SSB或参考CSI-RS资源在网络侧由同一个TRP或者同一个panel或者相同的波束来发送。如果两个下行信号或下行信道的传输TRP或传输panel或发送波束不同,通常会配置不同的TCI状态。
对于下行控制信道,可以通过RRC信令或者RRC信令+MAC信令的方式来指示对应CORESET的TCI状态。
对于下行数据信道,可用的TCI状态集合通过RRC信令来指示,并通过媒体接入控制(Media Access Control,MAC)层信令来激活其中部分TCI状态,最后通过DCI中的TCI状态指示域从激活的TCI状态中指示一个或两个TCI状态,用于所述DCI调度的PDSCH。2个TCI状态的情况主要是针对多个TRP类似的场景。具体例如,如图4所示,网络设备通过RRC信令指示N个候选的TCI状态,并通过MAC信令激活K个TCI状态,最后通过DCI中的TCI状态指示域从激活的TCI状态中指示1个或2个使用的TCI状态。
为便于更好的理解本申请实施例,对本申请相关的统一的TCI状态(Unified TCI state)进行说明。
TCI状态的指示机制仅适用于下行的信道和信号,且在NR系统中应用起来有诸多的限制。为了给NR系统提供一个更统一的上下行波束管理机制,提出了统一的TCI状态的概念,增加的重要新功能举例如下:
设计了2种统一的TCI状态的模式,即如下模式一和模式二;
下行信道(部分PDCCH,PDSCH)和信号(非周期CSI-RS)使用相同的下行发射指示波束,使用下行TCI状态或联合TCI状态(joint TCI state)。这类TCI状态称作独立TCI state(separate TCI state);
上行信道(如PUCCH或PUSCH)和信号(如SRS)使用相同的上行发射波束,使用上行TCI状态(UL TCI state)或联合TCI状态(joint TCI state);
统一的TCI状态(Unified TCI state)可以使用MAC CE和/或DCI动态更新和指示;
适用于载波聚合的场景,单载波单元(Component carrier,CC)上的波束指示可以适用于多个不同的CC;
上行的波束指示可以和上行的功率控制参数通过UL TCI state或joint TCI state同时给出;
支持小区间的波束管理功能。
模式一:包含1类TCI state,这类TCI state可以适用于上行和下行的信道和信号;这类TCI state称作联合TCI状态(joint TCI state)。
模式二:包含两类TCI state,其中DL TCI state仅适用于下行的信道和信号;UL TCI state仅适用于上行的信道和信号。
对于每个CC上的CORESET来说,大致可以分为一下四种类型:
CORESET A:仅关联到UE专属的搜索空间上,因此可以认为其是UE专属的下行控制信道资源,且一定要跟随被指示的统一的TCI状态(Unified TCI state);
CORESET B:仅关联到小区公共的搜索空间上,其是否可以跟随NW指示的统一的TCI状态(Unified TCI state),需要看网络设备的RRC配置;
CORESET C:关联到UE专属的搜索空间上,也关联到小区公共的搜索空间上,其是否可以跟随网络设备指示的统一的TCI状态(Unified TCI state),需要看网络设备的RRC配置;
CORESET 0:其一定关联到小区公共的搜索空间,也可以同时关联到UE专属的搜索空间,其是否可以跟随网络设备指示的统一的TCI状态(Unified TCI state),需要看网络设备的RRC配置。
现阶段,在统一的TCI状态(Unified TCI state)机制中,没有考虑多TRP传输的场景,只支持了单TRP的场景。
需要注意的是,在提到TCI state时,如果没有明确指明是哪种TCI state,则包含前述提到的任意TCI state,即TCI state可以是joint TCI state,可以是separate TCI state,可以是DL TCI state,也可使UL TCI state,也可以是他们的组合(即包含多个不同类型的TCI state)。如果是使用RRC参数TCI-State(两个词之间有一个连接符号),那么一般指的是DL TCI state和/或joint TCI state。如果是使用RRC参数下行或联合TCI状态(DLorJointTCIState),那么一般指的是DL TCI state和/或joint TCI state。如果是使用RRC参数上行TCI状态(UL-TCIState或TCI-UL-State或UL-TCI-State),那么一般指的是上行TCI state和/或joint TCI state。
为便于更好的理解本申请实施例,对本申请所解决的问题进行说明。
针对多TRP传输系统中的PUSCH重复传输(repetition),统一的TCI状态(Unified TCI state) 如何配置和指示,还缺乏完善的方案和具体细节。
基于上述问题,本申请提出了一种配置或指示统一的TCI状态的方案,针对多发送接收点(M-TRP)/天线面板(panel)/波束(beam)的传输场景中PUSCH传输方案,给出统一的TCI状态(Unified TCI state)的配置、指示和确定方案。
以下通过具体实施例详述本申请的技术方案。
图5是根据本申请实施例的无线通信的方法200的示意性流程图,如图5所示,该无线通信的方法200可以包括如下内容中的至少部分内容:
S210,网络设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合的用途均为用于基于码本(Codebook based)或基于非码本(Non-Codebook based)的PUSCH;其中,该第一SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;或者,该第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;其中,该K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前激活的TCI状态,K1为正整数;
S220,终端设备接收该第一指示信息。
在本申请实施例中,第一SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联。也即,本申请实施例明确了第一SRS资源集合和/或第二SRS资源集合关联的TCI状态,从而可以基于第一SRS资源集合及其关联的TCI状态确定与第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系,和/或,基于第二SRS资源集合及其关联的TCI状态确定与第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。或者,在本申请实施例中,两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,也即,本申请实施例明确了两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与TCI状态的关联关系,从而可以基于SRS资源及其关联的TCI状态,确定与SRS资源关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
在本申请实施例中,K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前激活的(active或activated)TCI状态,或者也可以表述为K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前使用的(applied)TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,对于终端设备,该K1个TCI状态用于确定上行传输;对于网络设备,该K1个TCI状态用于指示上行传输。
在一些实施例中,该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为联合TCI状态(joint TCI state),或者,该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为上行TCI状态(上行TCI state)。
在一些实施例中,本申请实施例所述的TCI状态为统一的TCI状态(Unified TCI state)。具体的,网络设备可以通过一个指示信息指示统一的TCI状态的类型为联合TCI状态,也即,该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为联合TCI状态(joint TCI state);或者,具体的,网络设备可以通过一个指示信息指示统一的TCI状态的类型为独立TCI状态(separate TCI state),也即,该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为上行TCI状态(UL TCI state)。
在一些实施例中,第一指示信息可以通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,DCI信令,MAC CE信令。
在一些实施例中,该第一指示信息用于指示第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合,换句话说,该第一指示信息用于指示两个SRS资源集合(SRS resource set)。例如,两个SRS资源集合中SRS资源集合ID较小的为第一SRS资源集合,SRS资源集合ID较大的为第二SRS资源集合。又例如,两个SRS资源集合中SRS资源集合ID较大的为第一SRS资源集合,SRS资源集合ID较小的为第二SRS资源集合。
在一些实施例中,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合的用途均为用于基于码本(codebook)或非码本(non codebook)的PUSCH。换句话说,该第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源集合的用途(usage)为用于基于码本(codebook)的PUSCH,或者,该第一指示信息指示的该两个SRS资源集合的用途(usage)为用于基于非码本(non codebook)的PUSCH。也即,该第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源集合的配置信息中的SRS-ResourceSet中的RRC参数usage均设为“codebook”或者均设为“nonCodebook”。
在一些实施例中,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合是在RRC参数中配置的,其中,该RRC参数为SRS资源集合增加或修改列表(srs-ResourceSetToAddModList)或SRS资源集合增加或修改列表DCI-0-2(srs-ResourceSetToAddModListDCI-0-2)。
在一些实施例中,该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中指示了跟踪(follow)统一的TCI状态,该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中指示了跟踪(follow)统一的TCI状态。
具体例如,第一SRS资源集合对应的配置信令中配置了第一参数或第二参数;或者,第一SRS 资源集合对应的配置信令中的第一参数被使能了(enabled),或者,第一SRS资源集合对应的配置信令中的第二参数被使能了(enabled)。其中,该第一参数为:跟随统一的TCI状态的SRS(followUnifiedTCIstateSRS),该第二参数为:跟随统一的TCI状态(followUnifiedTCIstate)。
具体例如,第二SRS资源集合对应的配置信令中配置了第一参数或第二参数;或者,第二SRS资源集合对应的配置信令中的第一参数被使能了(enabled),或者,第二SRS资源集合对应的配置信令中的第二参数被使能了(enabled)。其中,该第一参数为:跟随统一的TCI状态的SRS(followUnifiedTCIstateSRS),该第二参数为:跟随统一的TCI状态(followUnifiedTCIstate)。
例如,followUnifiedTCIstateSRS被使能的语义字段可以如下所示:
followUnifiedTCIstateSRS-r17ENUMERATED{enabled}。
在一些实施例中,在该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1>1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联。也即,在K1>1的情况下,第一SRS资源集合与第一TCI状态关联,第二SRS资源集合与第二TCI状态关联。
在一些实施例中,在该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且该K1个TCI状态仅包括第一TCI状态的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合均与该第一TCI状态关联;或者,该第一SRS资源集合与该第一TCI状态关联,且该第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态。也即,在K1=1的情况下,第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合均与第一TCI状态关联,或者,第一SRS资源集合与第一TCI状态关联,且第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在该两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1>1的情况下,该两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的一个TCI状态关联,该两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的另一个TCI状态关联。
在一些实施例中,在该两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1=1的情况下,该两个SRS资源均与该K1个TCI状态中的一个TCI状态关联;或者,该两个SRS资源的一个SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且该两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源未关联TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合。
可选地,作为示例1,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第七指示信息,其中,该第七指示信息可以用于指示unified TCI state类型为联合TCI状态(joint TCI state)。具体的,联合TCI状态可以用于上行操作(UL operation)或上行传输(UL transmission),也可以用于下行操作(DL operation)或下行传输/接收(DL transmission/reception)。可选地,该第七指示信息通过RRC信息元素(IE)参数统一TCI状态类型(unifiedTCI-StateType)指示,其取值为“联合(Joint)”。可选地,该第七指示信息针对服务小区(serving cell)配置的。可选地,该第七指示信息在RRC信息元素(IE)参数服务小区配置(ServingCellConfig)里面指示的。
可选地,作为示例1,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第八指示信息,其中,该第八指示信息用于配置或指示一组TCI状态(为描述方便,记为第一TCI状态组),该第一TCI状态组包含多个TCI状态。可选的,该第一TCI状态组可以用于上行操作或上行传输,也可以同于下行操作或下行传输。可选地,该第八指示信息通过RRC参数配置。可选的,该第八指示信息在RRC信息元素(IE)参数PDSCH配置(PDSCH-Config)中配置。可选的,该第八指示信息通过RRC信息元素(IE)参数下行或联合TCI状态列表(dl-OrJoint-TCIStateList)来指示。
可选地,作为示例2,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第七指示信息,其中,该第七指示信息可以用于指示unified TCI state类型为独立TCI状态(separate TCI state)。具体的,上行TCI状态可以用于上行操作(UL operation)或上行传输(UL transmission);下行TCI状态可以用于下行操作(DL operation)或下行传输/接收(DL transmission/reception)。可选地,该第七指示信息通过RRC信息元素(IE)参数统一TCI状态类型(unifiedTCI-StateType)指示,其取值为“独立(Separate)”。可选地,该第七指示信息针对服务小区(serving cell)配置的。可选地,该第七指示信息在RRC信息元素(IE)参数服务小区配置(ServingCellConfig)里面指示的。
可选地,作为示例2,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第九指示信息,其中,该第九指示信息用于配置或指示第二TCI状态组,该第二TCI状态组包含一个或多个DL TCI状态。可选的,该第二TCI状态组用于下行操作或下行传输。可选的,该第九指示信息通过RRC参数配置。可选的,该第九指 示信息在RRC信息元素(IE)参数PDSCH配置(PDSCH-Config)中配置。可选的,该第九指示信息通过RRC信息元素(IE)参数下行或联合TCI状态列表(dl-OrJoint-TCIStateList)。
可选地,作为示例2,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第十指示信息,其中,该第十指示信息用于配置或指示第三TCI状态组,该第三TCI状态组包含一个或多个UL TCI状态。可选的,该第三UL TCI状态组用于上行操作或上行传输。可选的,该第十指示信息通过RRC参数配置。可选的,该第十指示信息在RRC IE参数目标上行BWP(BWP-UplinkDedicated)中配置。可选的,该第十指示信息通过RRC IE参数上行TCI增加或修改列表(ul-TCI-ToAddModList)来指示。
在一些实施例中,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第二指示信息,其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息。
在一些实施例中,该第二指示信息通过第一MAC CE信令承载;其中,该第一MAC CE信令还包括以下至少之一:服务小区指示信息,下行BWP指示信息,上行BWP指示信息,一个或多个TCI数量指示域,一个或多个TCI类型指示域,一个或多个TCI状态指示域。具体的,使用MAC CE信令延时比RRC信令低,同时也具有较好的传输可靠性,便于网络快速指示UE进行相应的操作。
具体的,服务小区指示信息,例如可以是服务小区标识(serving cell ID)来指示对应的服务小区,该第一MAC CE信令应用于该服务小区。可选的,服务小区指示信息对应的信息域(field)长度为5比特(5bits)。
具体的,下行带宽部分(DL BWP)指示信息,例如可以是DL BWP ID来指示对应的DL BWP,该第一MAC CE信令应用于该DL BWP。可选的,下行带宽部分(DL BWP)指示信息对应的信息域(field)长度为2比特。
具体的,上行带宽部分(UL BWP)指示信息,例如可以是UL BWP ID来指示对应的UL BWP,该第一MAC CE信令应用于该UL BWP。可选的,上行带宽部分(UL BWP)指示信息对应的信息域(field)长度为2比特。
具体的,一个或多个TCI数量指示域中的每个TCI数量指示域指示一个码点(codepoint)对应一个或多个TCI状态。
具体的,一个或多个TCI类型指示域中的每个TCI类型指示域用于指示对应的TCI状态为下行TCI状态,或者为上行TCI状态,或者为联合TCI状态。
具体的,一个或多个TCI状态指示域,每个TCI状态指示域指示1个TCI状态,该1个TCI状态属于上述第一TCI状态组。
具体的,一个或多个TCI状态指示域,每个TCI状态指示域指示对应的TCI状态是否存在。可选的,该TCI状态指示域与另外一个TCI状态指示域在同一个字节(Octet,Oct)中。
具体的,一个或多个TCI数量指示域,每个TCI数量指示域指示一个码点(codepoint)对应N个TCI状态。因此,可以指示上行TCI状态和下行TCI状态的总数量,能够减少比特数,压缩MAC CE信令的开销。可选的,每个TCI数量指示域有2比特,或者,每个TCI数量指示域有3个比特。
可选的,每个TCI数量指示域指示一个codepoint对应1个或2个联合TCI状态(Joint TCI state)。本实施例具体可以对应上述示例1。
可选的,N的取值可以为1,2,3,4中的值。因此,协议设计和系统实现简单,能够获得多TRP(M-TRP)的绝大部分性能增益,以及网络配置和调度较为灵活。可选的,下行TCI状态的数量小于或等于2。可选的,上行TCI状态的数量小于或等于2。本实施例具体可以对应上述示例2。
可选的,N的取值可以为1,2,3,4,5,6中的值。因此,可以支持更多TRP进行下行传输,在部分场景下,对下行性能有一些提升,为网络优化提供更大的自由度。可选的,下行TCI状态的数量小于或等于4。可选的,上行TCI状态的数量小于或等于2。本实施例具体可以对应上述示例2。
可选的,N的取值可以为1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8中的值。因此,可以支持更多TRP进行下行传输和上行传输,在部分场景下,对下行和上行性能有一些提升,为网络优化提供更大的自由度。可选的,下行TCI状态的数量小于或等于4。可选的,上行TCI状态的数量小于或等于4。本实施例具体可以对应上述示例2。
可选的,每个TCI数量指示域指示一个codepoint对应1个或2个或3个或4个联合TCI状态(Joint TCI state)。因此,可以支持更多TRP进行下行传输和上行传输,在部分场景下,对下行和上行性能有一些提升,为网络优化提供更大的自由度。可选地,TCI数量指示域的数量为8,或16。本实施例具体可以对应上述示例1。
具体的,一个或多个TCI类型指示域中的TCI状态类型指示域,用于指示对应的TCI状态是下行TCI状态,或者上行TCI状态,或者联合TCI状态。
可选的,TCI状态类型指示域用于指示所在同一个octet的TCI状态指示信息指示的是下行TCI 状态或联合TCI状态,还是上行TCI状态。
可选的,TCI状态类型指示域用于指示所在同一个octet的TCI状态指示信息指示的是上述第二TCI状态组中的TCI状态,还是上述第三TCI状态组中的TCI状态。
具体的,TCI状态指示信息(即第二指示信息),可选地,如果该TCI状态指示信息用于指示下行TCI状态或联合TCI状态,那么该TCI状态指示信息长度为7比特。
具体的,TCI状态指示信息(即第二指示信息),可选地,如果该TCI状态指示信息用于指示上行TCI状态,那么该TCI状态指示信息长度为7比特。因此,能够指示更多的上行TCI状态,提高网络调度灵活性。
具体的,TCI状态指示信息(即第二指示信息),可选的,如果该TCI状态指示信息用于指示上行TCI状态,那么该TCI状态指示信息中的最高位(the most significant bit)是保留比特,剩余的6比特指示UL TCI state。
可选地,该第一MAC CE信令还可以包括TCI状态子集合数目(或者DCI码点)数量指示信息,其可以指示的数值为1到S之间的正整数,其中,S可以是TCI数量指示域的数量。因此,可以让UE减少读取/解析部分比特的信息,降低终端实现复杂度。可选的,该数值可以是第二MAC CE中指示的TCI状态对应的DCI中第一域的codepoint的数目;可选的,第一域为DCI中的传输配置指示(Transmission configuration indication)域。
在一些实施例中,该第一MAC CE指示的TCI状态的最大数量为32或48或64;或者,该第一MAC CE激活的TCI状态的最大数量为32,或者48,或者64。也即,该第二指示信息所指示的TCI状态的最大数量为32或48或64。
其中,在最大数量为32的情况下,最多支持上下行都是2个TRP传输,(2+2)*8=32。
其中,在最大数量为48的情况下,最多支持下行4个TRP传输,上行2个TRP传输,提高下行传输性能,提高网络配置和调度的灵活性,同时也把UE实现复杂度控制在一定范围。
其中,在最大数量为64的情况下,最多支持下行4个TRP传输,上行4个TRP传输,提高下行和上行传输性能,提高网络配置和调度的灵活性,以UE实现复杂度为代价。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态标识确定,和/或,该第二TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态标识确定。也即,可以基于预设规则(即TCI状态标识)确定第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,可以有效地降低产品实现复杂度。
具体例如,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态。
具体又例如,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
需要说明的是,TCI状态标识也可以称之为TCI状态索引或TCI状态编号,本申请对此并不限定。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置信息确定,和/或,该第二TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置信息确定;其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该K1个TCI状态。也即,可以基于预设规则(即K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置信息)确定第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,可以有效地降低产品实现复杂度。
具体例如,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态。
具体又例如,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一TCI状态由网络设备通过第三指示信息指示,和/或,该第二TCI状态由网络设备通过第四指示信息指示。也即,网络设备可以通过第三指示信息指示K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态,和/或,网络设备可以通过第四指示信息指示K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,或者,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,或者,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,或者,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的 指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该K1个TCI状态。因此,可以基于第三指示信息确定第一SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,可以降低信令开销。
在一些实施例中,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,或者,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,或者,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,或者,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该K1个TCI状态。因此,可以基于第四指示信息确定第二SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,可以降低信令开销。
具体例如,第三指示信息用于指示第一TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,以及第四指示信息用于指示第二TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态。
具体又例如,第三指示信息用于指示第一TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,以及第四指示信息用于指示第二TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
具体例如,第三指示信息用于指示第一TCI状态为K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,以及第四指示信息用于指示第二TCI状态为K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态。
具体又例如,第三指示信息用于指示第一TCI状态为K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态,以及第四指示信息用于指示第二TCI状态为K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在该终端设备未获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态。因此,可以基于是否获取到第三指示信息确定第一SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,或者,可以基于网络设备是否配置了第三指示信息确定第一SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,可以降低信令开销。
在一些实施例中,在该终端设备未获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。因此,可以基于是否获取到第三指示信息确定第一SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,或者,可以基于网络设备是否配置了第三指示信息确定第一SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,可以降低信令开销。
在一些实施例中,在该终端设备未获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态。因此,可以基于是否获取到第四指示信息确定第二SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,或者,可以基于网络设备是否配置了第四指示信息确定第二SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,可以降低信令开销。
在一些实施例中,在该终端设备未获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。因此,可以基于是否获取到第四指示信息确定第二SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,或者,可以基于网络设备是否配置了第四指示信息确定第二SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,可以降低信令开销。
具体例如,在该终端设备未获取到该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;以及,在该终端设备获取到该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
具体又例如,在该终端设备未获取到该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;以及,在该终端设 备获取到该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在该第三指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该第三指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态。因此,可以基于第三指示信息确定第一SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,信令结构灵活,便于未来扩展到K1>2的情况。
在一些实施例中,在该第三指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在该第三指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。因此,可以基于第三指示信息确定第一SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,信令结构灵活,便于未来扩展到K1>2的情况。
在一些实施例中,在该第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态。因此,可以基于第四指示信息确定第二SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,信令结构灵活,便于未来扩展到K1>2的情况。
在一些实施例中,在该第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在该第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。因此,可以基于第四指示信息确定第二SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态,信令结构灵活,便于未来扩展到K1>2的情况。
具体例如,在第三指示信息为第一取值,且第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,第一TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,第二TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;以及,在第三指示信息为第二取值,且第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,第一TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,第二TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
具体又例如,在第三指示信息为第一取值,且第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,第一TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,第二TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;以及,在第三指示信息为第二取值,且第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,第一TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,第二TCI状态为K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,2个SRS资源集合(即第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合)中SRS资源集合ID最小SRS资源集合对应K1=2个TCI state中标识(ID)最小的TCI state,2个SRS资源集合(即第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合)中SRS资源集合ID最大SRS资源集合对应K1=2个TCI state中标识(ID)最大的TCI state。
在一些实施例中,2个SRS资源集合(即第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合)中SRS资源集合ID最大SRS资源集合对应K1=2个TCI state中标识(ID)最小的TCI state,2个SRS资源集合(即第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合)中SRS资源集合ID最小SRS资源集合对应K1=2个TCI state中标识(ID)最大的TCI state。
在一些实施例中,2个资源集合(即第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合)中SRS资源集合ID最小SRS资源集合对应K1=2个TCI state中在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI state,2个资源集合(即第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合)中SRS资源集合ID最大SRS资源集合对应K1=2个TCI state中在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI state。
在一些实施例中,2个资源集合(即第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合)中SRS资源集合ID最大SRS资源集合对应K1=2个TCI state中在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI state,2个资源集合(即第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合)中SRS资源集合ID最小SRS资源集合对应K1=2个TCI state中在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI state。
在一些实施例中,该第三指示信息包含在该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中,和/或,该第四指示信息包含在该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中。
在一些实施例中,在该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中不包含:followUnifiedTCIstateSRS或者followUnifiedTCIstate,或者,该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含:去使能的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS或者followUnifiedTCIstate,或者,该终端设备忽略该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS或者followUnifiedTCIstate。
在一些实施例中,在该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中不包含followUnifiedTCIstateSRS或者followUnifiedTCIstate,或者,该第 二SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含去使能的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS或者followUnifiedTCIstate,或者,该终端设备忽略该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS或者followUnifiedTCIstate。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态确定,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第二TCI状态确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,与该第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器(UL TX spatial filter)或空间关系(spatial relation)基于该第一TCI状态和/或该第一SRS资源集合确定。例如,与第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于第一TCI状态和第一SRS资源集合确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为联合TCI状态(joint TCI state)的情况下,与该第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态中的typeD(类型D)对应的参考信号和该第一SRS资源集合确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为上行TCI状态(UL TCI state)的情况下,与该第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态中的参考信号和该第一SRS资源集合确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,与该第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器(UL TX spatial filter)或空间关系(spatial relation)基于该第二TCI状态和/或该第二SRS资源集合确定。例如,与第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于第二TCI状态和第二SRS资源集合确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为联合TCI状态(joint TCI state)的情况下,与该第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第二TCI状态中的typeD(类型D)对应的参考信号和该第二SRS资源集合确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为上行TCI状态(UL TCI state)的情况下,与该第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第二TCI状态中的参考信号和该第二SRS资源集合确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1=1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于该第一TCI状态确定。具体例如,在K1=1,且第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合均与第一TCI状态关联的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于该第一TCI状态确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1=1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑该第二SRS资源集合。具体例如,在K1=1,以及第一SRS资源集合与第一TCI状态关联,且第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑该第二SRS资源集合。
在一些实施例中,在K1=1的情况下,与该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于该第一TCI状态和/或该第一SRS资源集合确定。具体例如,在K1=1,且第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合均与第一TCI状态关联的情况下,与该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于该第一TCI状态和/或该第一SRS资源集合确定。
在一些实施例中,与该第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态和该第一SRS资源集合确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑该第二SRS资源集合。具体例如,在K1=1,以及第一SRS资源集合与第一TCI状态关联,且第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态的情况下,与该第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态和该第一SRS资源集合确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑该第二SRS资源集合。
在一些实施例中,该K1个TCI状态属于N个TCI状态;
其中,该N个TCI状态中的至少部分TCI状态为上行传输对应的激活的TCI状态,该N个TCI状态由网络设备配置或指示,N为正整数,且K1≤N。
可选地,对于终端设备,N个TCI状态中的至少部分TCI状态用于确定上行传输;对于网络设备,N个TCI状态中的至少部分TCI状态用于指示上行传输。
具体例如,该N个TCI状态中的K1个TCI状态用于上行传输,该N个TCI状态中的K2个TCI状态用于下行传输。其中,0<=K1<=N,0<=K2<=N。例如,K1=K2,或者,N=K1且K2=0,或者其 他组合。
具体例如,K1=N,且N个TCI状态为N个上行TCI状态;或者,K1=N,且N个TCI状态为N个联合TCI状态,同时用于上行传输和下行传输。
在一些实施例中,该K1个TCI状态由网络设备通过第五指示信息指示。换句话说,网络设备可以通过第五指示信息指示N个TCI状态中的K1个TCI状态。因此,在本实施例中,引入新的指示信息(即第五指示信息),可以把上下行独立配置多TRP(M-TRP)传输,降低终端实现复杂度,便于更多类型终端支持这一功能。
在一些实施例中,该第五指示信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令,DCI信令。
需要说明的是,RRC可靠性好,但是延时大;DCI延时小,信令开销(overhead)小,但是可靠性差;MAC CE可靠性比DCI好,信令开销(overhead)和延时均比RRC小。
在一些实施例中,该第五指示信息用于指示该K1个TCI状态为按照第一顺序依次从该N个TCI状态选取的K1个TCI状态。因此,在本实施例中,可以根据预设规则(即第一顺序)从N个TCI状态选取的K1个TCI状态,可以有效地降低产品实现复杂度。
在一些实施例中,该第一顺序为TCI状态标识从小到大的顺序,或者,该第一顺序为TCI状态标识从大到小的顺序。当然,该第一顺序也可以可以是其他类型的顺序,例如,奇数位TCI状态标识从小到大的顺序,或者,偶数位TCI状态标识从小到大的顺序,本申请对此并不限定。
具体例如,该第五指示信息用于指示该K1个TCI状态为按照TCI状态标识从小到大的顺序依次从该N个TCI状态选取的K1个TCI状态。
具体又例如,该第五指示信息用于指示该K1个TCI状态为按照TCI状态标识从大到小的顺序依次从该N个TCI状态选取的K1个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第一顺序可以由协议约定,或者,该第一顺序可以由网络设备配置。
在一些实施例中,该第五指示信息用于指示该K1个TCI状态为按照该N个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置顺序依次选取的K1个TCI状态;其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该N个TCI状态。因此,在本实施例中,可以根据预设规则(即N个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置顺序)从N个TCI状态选取的K1个TCI状态,可以有效地降低产品实现复杂度。
在一些实施例中,该N个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中的位置顺序为从前到后的顺序,或者,该N个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中的位置顺序为从后到前的顺序。
具体例如,该第五指示信息用于指示该K1个TCI状态为按照该N个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置从前到后的顺序依次选取的K1个TCI状态。
具体又例如,该第五指示信息用于指示该K1个TCI状态为按照该N个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置从后到前的顺序依次选取的K1个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该N个TCI状态由网络设备通过第六指示信息指示。也即,网络设备可以直接指示N个TCI状态,或者,网络设备可以从预配置的多个TCI状态中指示N个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该N个TCI状态由网络设备通过第二指示信息指示,其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该N个TCI状态。也即,网络设备可以直接指示N个TCI状态,或者,网络设备可以从预配置的多个TCI状态中指示N个TCI状态。可选地,此种情况下,该第二指示信息与上述第六指示可以为同一指示信息。
在一些实施例中,该N个TCI状态为基于第二指示信息从网络设备通过第六指示信息指示的TCI状态中确定的;其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该N个TCI状态。具体例如,网络设备可以通过第六指示信息指示多个TCI状态,以及通过第二指示信息指示多个TCI状态中的N个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第六指示信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令,DCI信令。
具体例如,该第六指示信息可以为DCI信令,如第六指示信息通过DCI信令中第一域(field)来传输,该第一域为DCI信令中的传输配置指示(Transmission configuration indication)域。
在一些实施例中,该终端设备可以根据该第六指示信息确定以下一个或多个信息:
PDSCH DMRS对应的QCL信息(Quasi co-location);
PDCCH DMRS对应的QCL信息,或者部分CORESET对应的DMRS对应的QCL信息;
至少部分CSI-RS对应的QCL信息;
PUSCH的上行发送空间滤波器(UL TX spatial filter);
至少部分PUCCH的上行发送空间滤波器;
至少部分SRS的上行发送空间滤波器。
可选地,该至少部分SRS对应的SRS资源集合(SRS resource set)中配置了RRC参数:r17中跟踪统一的TCI状态的SRS(followUnifiedTCIstateSRS-r17)。
可选的,该第六指示信息和上述第二指示信息可以是同一个信息。例如只有一个codepoint对应有TCI state,那么此时不再需要额外的DCI来指示激活的TCI state。
可选的,该第六指示信息通过DCI信令传输,可选的,该第六指示信息通过DCI信令中的Transmission configuration indication域来传输。例如当有多个codepoint对应有TCI state,那么需要DCI来额外指示使用哪个codepoint对应的TCI state来作为激活的TCI state。
可选的,承载该第六指示信息的DCI为DCI格式1_1和/或DCI格式1_2,其中DCI格式1_1或DCI格式1_2可以同时调度数据或者不调度下行传输(with or without,if applicable,DL assignment)。
可选的,承载该第六指示信息的DCI为DCI格式1_1和/或DCI格式1_2和/或DCI格式0_1和/或DCI格式0_2,其中,DCI格式1_1/1_2可是同时调度数据或者不调度下行传输(with or without,if applicable,DL assignment),DCI格式0_1/0_2可是同时调度数据或者不调度上行传输(with or without,if applicable,UL assignment)。
可选的,如果不调度下行传输(without DL assignment),对于DCI格式1_1/1_2,终端设备可以进行如下假设(或者说,DCI格式1_1/1_2满足如下条件):
该DCI的循环冗余码校验(Cyclical Redundancy Check,CRC)由配置调度无线网络临时标识(Configured Scheduling Radio Network Temporary Identity,CS-RNTI)加扰;
该DCI中的信息域可以设置如下:冗余版本(Redundancy Version,RV)=所有'1's,调制编码方案(Modulation and Coding Scheme,MCS)=所有'1's,新数据指示(New Data Indicator,NDI)=0,频域资源分配(frequency domain resource assignment,FDRA)类型0所有设置为'0's,或者,FDRA类型1所有设置为'1's,或者,动态切换(dynamicSwitch)所有为'0's。
如果第六指示信息指示的一个或多个TCI state中至少一个TCI state(记为TCI state X)与先前指示的(the previously indicated)TCI state中的任意一个都不同(考虑相同方向的,例如,如果TCI state X用于上行传输,则考虑先前指示的用于上行传输的TCI state与TCI state X不同;如果TCI state X用于下行传输/接收,则考虑先前指示的用于下行传输/接收的TCI state与TCI state X不同;如果TCI state X用于上行传输以及下行传输/接收,则考虑先前指示的用于上行传输以及下行传输/接收的TCI state与TCI state X不同;),或者如果第六指示信息指示的一个或多个TCI state中至少一个TCI state(记为TCI state X)与终端设备当前激活/使用(activated,或者applied)的所有TCI state中的任意一个都不同,从第一PUCCH的最后一个符号起之后的至少间隔BeamAppTime个符号后的第一个slot开始,第六指示信息指示的TCI state X生效,即终端设备可以根据TCI state X来确定上行发送空间滤波器,和/或下行传输/接收对应的QCL信息,其中第一PUCCH传输承载第一指示信息DCI对应的混合自动重传请求-应答(Hybrid Automatic Repeat request Acknowledgement,HARQ-ACK)信息。
对于上面额外给出一些例子。以一个DCI最多能指示2个用于下行传输/接收(DL operation,或者DL transmission/reception)的TCI state为例,其他情况(用于上行的TCI state,或者同时用于上行和下行的TCI state)可以类似扩展。假设网络先前指示了TCI state A1,TCI state A2用于下行传输,当前这次DCI指示的信号中包含了TCI state X,并且TCI state X和TCI state A1/A2都不同,则需要考虑上面的流程,来确定TCI state X在什么时候可以使用(can be applied)。再例如,目前终端设备使用1个或2个TCI state(记为A1,A2)来确定下行传输对应的QCL信息,当前这次DCI指示的信号中包含了TCI state X,并且TCI state X和TCI state A1/A2都不同,则需要考虑上面的流程,来确定TCI state X在什么时候可以使用(can be applied)。
在本申请实施例中,基于某个TCI state进行上行传输,或者TCI state用于上行传输,即根据TCI state确定上行传输对应的空间关系,或者确定对应的上行发送空间滤波器。例如,如果此TCI状态是UL TCI state,则根据此UL TCI state中的参考信号确定上行传输的空间关系,或者上行发送空间滤波器。又例如,如果TCI状态是joint TCI state,则是根据此joint TCI state中类型D(typeD)对应的参考信号确定上行传输的空间关系,或者上行发送空间滤波器。
在一些实施例中,终端设备发送第一终端能力信息;
其中,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示(Transmission configuration indication)域的一个码点(codepoint)最多激活或指示Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z1为正整数,且Z1>1。
换句话说,终端设备可以向网络设备上报第一终端能力信息,从而,网络设备可以基于第一终端能力信息激活或指示用于上行传输或上行重复传输的统一的TCI状态。
具体例如,Z1为2,或者Z1为4。
在一些实施例中,该第一终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
具体例如,第一终端能力信息按照频段粒度(per band)上报,也即,第一终端能力是针对频段(band)上报的(即不同的频段可以独立上报对应的能力)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端可以在某个或者某些频段(band)上支持,其他band上不支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第一终端能力信息按照频段组合粒度(per band combination)上报,也即,第一终端能力是按照频段组合(band combination)独立上报的。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段组合独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端可以在某个频段组合下不支持这一功能,但是在另一个频段组合下支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第一终端能力信息按照频段组合中的频段粒度(per band per band combination)上报,也即,第一终端能力是按照频段组合(band combination)中的每个频段独立上报的(即不同的频段组合中的频段可以独立上报)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段组合独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端可以在某个CA下不支持这一功能,但是在另一个CA组合下某些频段(band)支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第一终端能力信息按照频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度(per CC per band per band combination或per Feature Set Per Component-carrier)上报,也即,第一终端能力是按照频段组合(band combination)中的每个频段上每个载波独立上报的(即不同的频段组合中的频段中的不同载波CC可以独立上报)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段组合独立上报,并且一个band上的不同载波也可以独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第一终端能力信息按照频段范围粒度(per frequency range)上报,也即,第一终端能力是按照频段范围(Frequency range,FR)上报的(即不同的FR可以独立上报,per FR,即FR1和FR2各自独立上报)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的FR独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端低频(FR1)不支持这一功能,但是在FR2(高频)支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第一终端能力信息按照终端粒度(per UE)上报,也即,第一终端能力是针对UE上报的(即per UE,就是说如果UE上报这个能力,则在各个频段上都可以支持这个能力)。因此,在此种情况下,降低终端能力上报的信令开销。
在一些实施例中,该第一终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
在一些实施例中,终端设备发送第二终端能力信息;
其中,该第二终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持CG PUSCH。
换句话说,终端设备可以向网络设备上报第二终端能力信息,从而,网络设备可以基于第二终端能力信息确定终端设备支持CG PUSCH。
在一些实施例中,该第二终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
具体例如,第二终端能力信息按照频段粒度(per band)上报,也即,第二终端能力是针对频段(band)上报的(即不同的频段可以独立上报对应的能力)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端可以在某个或者某些频段(band)上支持,其他band上不支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第二终端能力信息按照频段组合粒度(per band combination)上报,也即,第二终端能力是按照频段组合(band combination)独立上报的。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段组合独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端可以在某个频段组合下不支持这一功能,但是在另一个频段组合下支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第二终端能力信息按照频段组合中的频段粒度(per band per band combination)上报,也即,第二终端能力是按照频段组合(band combination)中的每个频段独立上报的(即不同的频段组合中的频段可以独立上报)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段组合独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端可以在某个CA下不支持这一功能,但是在另一个CA组合下某些频段(band) 支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第二终端能力信息按照频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度(per CC per band per band combination或per FSPC)上报,也即,第二终端能力是按照频段组合(band combination)中的每个频段上每个载波独立上报的(即不同的频段组合中的频段中的不同载波CC可以独立上报)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段组合独立上报,并且一个band上的不同载波也可以独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第二终端能力信息按照频段范围粒度(per frequency range)上报,也即,第二终端能力是按照频段范围(Frequency range,FR)上报的(即不同的FR可以独立上报,per FR,即FR1和FR2各自独立上报)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的FR独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端低频(FR1)不支持这一功能,但是在FR2(高频)支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第二终端能力信息按照终端粒度(per UE)上报,也即,第二终端能力是针对UE上报的(即per UE,就是说如果UE上报这个能力,则在各个频段上都可以支持这个能力)。因此,在此种情况下,降低终端能力上报的信令开销。
需要说明的是,第一终端能力信息的上报粒度与第二终端能力信息的上报粒度可以相同,也可以不同。例如,一个终端能力信息的上报粒度为band,一个终端能力信息的上报粒度为per CC per band per band combination,因为上下行对终端能力要求不同,上下行能力使用不同的选项,可以更有利于终端实现。
在一些实施例中,该第二终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
在一些实施例中,该第二终端能力信息与该第一终端能力信息通过同一信令传输,或者,该第二终端能力信息与该第一终端能力信息通过不同的信令传输。
在一些实施例中,终端设备发送第三终端能力信息;
其中,该第三终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第三终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示(Transmission configuration indication)域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第三终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z2为正整数,且Z2>1。
换句话说,终端设备可以向网络设备上报第三终端能力信息,从而,网络设备可以基于第三终端能力信息激活或指示同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输的统一的TCI状态。
具体例如,Z2为2,或者Z2为4。
在一些实施例中,该第三终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
具体例如,第三终端能力信息按照频段粒度(per band)上报,也即,第三终端能力是针对频段(band)上报的(即不同的频段可以独立上报对应的能力)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端可以在某个或者某些频段(band)上支持,其他band上不支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第三终端能力信息按照频段组合粒度(per band combination)上报,也即,第三终端能力是按照频段组合(band combination)独立上报的。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段组合独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端可以在某个频段组合下不支持这一功能,但是在另一个频段组合下支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第三终端能力信息按照频段组合中的频段粒度(per band per band combination)上报,也即,第三终端能力是按照频段组合(band combination)中的每个频段独立上报的(即不同的频段组合中的频段可以独立上报)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段组合独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端可以在某个CA下不支持这一功能,但是在另一个CA组合下某些频段(band)支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第三终端能力信息按照频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度(per CC per band per band combination或per FSPC)上报,也即,第三终端能力是按照频段组合(band combination)中的每个频段上每个载波独立上报的(即不同的频段组合中的频段中的不同载波CC可以独立上报)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的频段组合独立上报,并且一个band上的不同载波也可以独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第三终端能力信息按照频段范围粒度(per frequency range)上报,也即,第三终端能 力是按照频段范围(Frequency range,FR)上报的(即不同的FR可以独立上报,per FR,即FR1和FR2各自独立上报)。因此,在此种情况下,不同的FR独立上报,可以让终端实现具有更大的自由度,例如终端低频(FR1)不支持这一功能,但是在FR2(高频)支持这一功能,从而可以让更多的终端来支持这一新功能。
具体例如,第三终端能力信息按照终端粒度(per UE)上报,也即,第三终端能力是针对UE上报的(即per UE,就是说如果UE上报这个能力,则在各个频段上都可以支持这个能力)。因此,在此种情况下,降低终端能力上报的信令开销。
需要说明的是,第一终端能力信息的上报粒度与第三终端能力信息的上报粒度可以相同,也可以不同。例如,一个终端能力信息的上报粒度为band,一个终端能力信息的上报粒度为per CC per band per band combination,因为上下行对终端能力要求不同,上下行能力使用不同的选项,可以更有利于终端实现。
在一些实施例中,该第三终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
具体的,第一终端能力信息和第三终端能力信息的区别,可以通过下面例子显示。
假设终端设备可以通过第一终端能力信息上报支持2个TCI状态(记为A1,A2),如果PUSCH有多次重复传输,那么在每次PUSCH传输时使用其中1个TCI状态,但是不同次PUSCH传输可以使用不同的TCI状态。例如PUSCH重复传输4次,分别对应的TCI状态可能为A1,A2,A1,A2。即A1和A2没有同时在一次传输中使用,或者说,没有同时使用A1和A2确定一次PUSCH传输。
假设终端设备可以通过第三终端能力信息上报支持2个TCI状态(记为A1,A2),如果PUSCH有多次重复传输,那么在每次传输时使用根据这两个(即A1+A2)来确定PUSCH传输。例如PUSCH重复传输4次,分别对应的TCI状态为A1+A2,A1+A2,A1+A2,A1+A2。
以下通过具体实施例详述本申请中确定动态调度的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系的方案(即实施例1),或者,确定配置授权(CG)类型1的PUSCH(CG PUSCH Type1)对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系的方案(即实施例2),或者,确定配置授权(CG)类型2的PUSCH(CG PUSCH Type2)对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系的方案(即实施例3)。
实施例1,终端设备接收第一DCI,其中,该第一DCI用于调度第一PUSCH;以及该终端设备根据第一信息确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系;或者,根据第一信息确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输。
其中,该第一信息为以下至少之一:该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态,该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态,该第一SRS资源集合,该第二SRS资源集合。
其中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合与该第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该第二TCI状态关联。
其中,在K1=1,且该K1个TCI状态仅包括第一TCI状态的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合均与该第一TCI状态关联;或者,该第一SRS资源集合与该第一TCI状态关联,且该第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态。
在实施例1中,该终端设备在接收上述第二指示信息和/或第六指示信息之后,才接收该第一DCI。
可选的,该第一DCI的格式可以是DCI格式0_0,或者,该第一DCI的格式可以是DCI格式0_1,或者,该第一DCI的格式可以是DCI格式0_2。
在实施例1中一些实现方式中,在K1>1,且该第一DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,该终端设备根据该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中预设的TCI状态确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
例如,当第一DCI的格式(format)是DCI format 0_0,终端设备可以使用K1个TCI状态中标识(ID)最小的TCI状态确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
再例如,当第一DCI的格式(format)是DCI format 0_0,终端设备可以使用K1个TCI状态中标识(ID)最大的TCI状态确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
再例如,当第一DCI的格式(format)是DCI format 0_0,终端设备可以使用K1个TCI状态中在第三指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态确定第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
再例如,当第一DCI的格式(format)是DCI format 0_0,终端设备可以使用K1个TCI状态中在第三指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态确定第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
在实施例1中一些实现方式中,在K1>1,且该第一DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,该终端设备根据该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中网络设备指示的TCI状态确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。因此,在本实施例中,使用新的指示信息来灵活配置,能够增加系统灵活性,为网络优化提供自由度。
具体的,如果第一DCI为DCI格式0_0,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第十一指示信息,其中,该第十一指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中的TCI状态;以及该终端设备根据该第十一指示信息确定采用该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中哪个TCI状态确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
可选的,该第十一指示信息可以通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC信令,DCI信令。
可选的,该第十一指示信息可以指示使用该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中ID小的TCI状态来确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
可选的,该第十一指示信息可以指示使用该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中ID大的TCI状态来确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
可选的,该第十一指示信息可以指示使用该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中在上述第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态来确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
可选的,该第十一指示信息可以指示使用该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中在上述第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态来确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
在实施例1中一些实现方式中,在K1>1,且该第一DCI为DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2的情况下,该终端设备根据该第一TCI状态、该第一SRS资源集合、该第二TCI状态和该第二SRS资源集合,确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输。
在实施例1中一些实现方式中,在K1=1的情况下,该终端设备根据该第一SRS资源集合和该第一TCI状态,确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输。
在实施例1中一些实现方式中,在K1=1的情况下,该终端设备根据该第二SRS资源集合和该第一TCI状态,确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输。
在实施例1中一些实现方式中,如果第一PUSCH需要重复传输M次(例如可以是第一PUSCH在M个连续时隙(slot)传输;又例如,第一PUSCH可以是有M次名义重传(nominal repetitions))。其中,第一次传输为初次传输,M为正整数。
具体的,第一DCI为DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2,当DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2中的SRS资源指示域指示第一取值(例如codepoint为“00”),第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的M次重复传输。
需要说明的是,第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的M次重复传输,也可以表述为,第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于确定第一PUSCH的M次重复传输对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
具体的,第一DCI为DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2,当DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2中的SRS资源指示域指示第二取值(例如codepoint为“01”),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于M次重复传输。
需要说明的是,第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的M次重复传输,也可以表述为,第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于确定第一PUSCH的M次重复传输对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
具体的,第一DCI为DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2,当DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2中的SRS资源指示域指示第三取值(例如codepoint为“10”)。
其中,当M=2时,第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的第1次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次重传),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第2次重传)。
其中,当M>2,如果RRC信息元素PUSCH配置(RRC IE PUSCH-Config)指示了循环映射(cyclicMapping)(即cyclicMapping被使能(enabled)),第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的第1次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次重传),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第2次重传),后续相同的映射图案依次重复,直到一共M次传输(the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots)。例如第1-4次重复传输,对应的SRS资源集合分别为:第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合。
其中,当M>2,如果RRC信息元素PUSCH配置(RRC IE PUSCH-Config)指示了序列映射(sequentialMapping)(即sequentialMapping被enabled),第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的第1次和第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个和第2个slot,或者M 个名义重传中的第1次和第2次重传),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的第3次和第4次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第3个和第4个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第3次和第4次重传),后续相同的映射图案依次重复,直到一共M次传输(the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots)。例如第1-8次重复传输,对应的SRS资源集合分别为:第一SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合。
具体的,第一DCI为DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2,当DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2中的SRS资源指示域指示第四取值(例如codepoint为“11”)。
其中,当M=2时,第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的第1次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次重传),第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第2次重传)。
其中,当M>2,如果RRC IE PUSCH-Config指示了循环映射(cyclicMapping)(即cyclicMapping被enabled),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的第1次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次重传),第一SRS resource set以及对应的第一TCI state用于第一PUSCH的第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第2次重传),后续相同的映射图案依次重复,直到一共M次传输(the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots)。例如第1-4次重复传输,对应的SRS资源集合分别为:第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合。
其中,当M>2,如果RRC IE PUSCH-Config指示了序列映射(sequentialMapping)(即sequentialMapping被enabled),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的第1次和第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个和第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次和第2次重传),第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第一PUSCH的第3次和第4次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第3个和第4个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第3次和第4次重传),后续相同的映射图案依次重复,直到一共M次传输(the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots)。例如第1-8次重复传输,对应的SRS资源集合分别为:第二SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合。
上述方案可以用于K1=2个TCI状态的情况。也可用于K1=1个TCI状态的情况,此时,第一TCI状态和第二TCI状态是同一个TCI状态,指的是该K1=1个TCI状态。
对于K1=1个TCI状态的情况,也可以有另外的方案,例如,只使用第一SRS资源集合以及该K1=1个TCI状态来进行第一PUSCH传输,一个例子是,使用第一SRS资源集合以及该K1=1个TCI状态来进行第一PUSCH的M次重复传输。
再例如,只使用第二SRS资源集合以及K1=1个TCI状态来进行第一PUSCH传输,一个例子是,使用第二SRS资源集合以及该K1=1个TCI状态来进行第一PUSCH的M次重复传输。
再例如,第一DCI为DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2,此时DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2中的SRS资源集合指示域取值受到限制,只能取部分取值,不能是另外一部分取值,例如只能取前述的第一取值(例如codepoint只能为“00”),或者只能取前述的第二取值(例如codepoint只能为“01”),或者只能取前述的第一取值和第二取值之一(例如codepoint只能为“00”或“01”)。
可选的,第一SRS资源集合对应第一DCI中的“SRS资源指示(SRS resource indicator)”指示域,第二SRS资源集合对应第一DCI中的“第二SRS资源指示(Second SRS resource indicator)”指示域。例如第一DCI中的“SRS资源指示(SRS resource indicator)”指示域指示的SRI对应第一SRS资源集合中的某个SRS资源,第一DCI中的“Second SRS resource indicator”指示域指示的SRI对应第二SRS资源集合中的某个SRS资源。
在实施例1中一些实现方式中,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第十二指示信息,其中,该第十二指示信息用于指示在第一PUSCH单次传输中,同时根据第一TCI状态和第二TCI状态确定第一PUSCH的传输。例如,终端设备根据第十二指示信息,在第一PUSCH的每次传输(如果有多次传输的话)中,均同时根据第一TCI状态和第二TCI状态确定第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
可选的,该第十二指示信息可以通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令,DCI信令。
可选的,该第十二指示信息可以是针对BWP配置的,即该第十二指示信息配置粒度为BWP。
可选的,该第十二指示信息是通过RRC参数PUSCH-Config配置的。
实施例2,终端设备根据第二信息确定第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输;
其中,该第二PUSCH为CG类型1的PUSCH,该第二PUSCH对应第一SRS资源和/或第二SRS资源,所述第一SRS资源为所述两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,所述第二SRS资源为所述两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源;
其中,该第二信息为以下至少之一:该第一SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第二SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第一SRS资源,该第二SRS资源。
在实施例2中,网络设备可以为终端设备配置1个或多个授权配置(Configured Grant Configuration),例如可以通过RRC信令配置1个BWP上的1个或多个配置授权。为了描述方便,以其中的1个授权配置(第一授权配置)为例,来介绍后续方案。
可选的,第一配置授权是配置授权类型1(configured grant Type 1)。
可选的,当第一配置授权是配置授权类型1时,网络设备针对第一配置授权还在RRC参数配置授权配置(configuredGrantConfig)中包含了RRC上行授权配置(rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant)。
具体例如,第一SRS资源是由第一配置授权对应的RRC参数rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant中的RRC参数SRS资源指示(srs-ResourceIndicator)指示。
具体例如,第二SRS资源是由第一配置授权对应的RRC参数rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant中的RRC参数SRS资源指示2(srs-ResourceIndicator2)指示。
可选地,网络设备还可以为第一配置授权配置以下一项或多项信息(例如通过RRC信令):
频域跳频指示信息,例如slot内跳频(intra-slot hopping),slot之间跳频(inter-slot hopping);
解调参考信号(DMRS)指示信息;
资源分配指示信息,例如时域,和/或频域资源分配;
功率控制参数指示信息;
预编码(precoding)指示信息;
SRS资源指示信息;
重复传输指示信息;
混合自动重传请求(Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest,HARQ)进程(HARQ process)指示信息。
在实施例2中,使用第一授权配置的信息,同时还使用RRC参数中pusch-Config的下列部分或全部信息:
a.PUSCH的数据扰码标识(dataScramblingIdentityPUSCH);
b.传输配置(txConfig);
c.码本子集(codebookSubset);
d.最大秩(maxRank);
e.PUSCH上的上行控制信息(Uplink Control Information,UCI)范围(scaling of UCI-OnPUSCH)。
在实施例2中一些实现方式中,若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源,该第一SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联。因此,可以将SRS资源直接关联TCI状态,减少关联层级,降低关联复杂度。
在实施例2中一些实现方式中,若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源,该第一SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第二SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第一SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联。因此,可以利用SRS资源集合与TCI状态的关联关系,可以保持不同PUSCH方式下处理的一致性,减少协议复杂度。
在实施例2中一些实现方式中,若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源,该第一SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第二SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第一SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联。因此,可以利用SRS资源集合与TCI状态的关联关系,可以保持不同PUSCH方式下处理的一致性,减少协议复杂度。
在实施例2中一些实现方式中,在该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源的情况下,该终端设备根据该第一TCI状态、该第一SRS资源、该第二TCI状态和该第二SRS资源,确定该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输。
在实施例2中一些实现方式中,若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源,该第一SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联。
在实施例2中一些实现方式中,在该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源的情况下,该终端设备根据该第一TCI状态和该第一SRS资源,确定该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输。
在实施例2中一些实现方式中,在K1=1且该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源的情况下,该终端设备可以根据该第一SRS资源,以及该K1=1个TCI状态,确定该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输。
在实施例2中一些实现方式中,在K1=1且该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源的情况下,该终端设备可以根据该第二SRS资源,以及该K1=1个TCI状态,确定该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输。
在实施例2中一些实现方式中,如果第二PUSCH需要重复传输M次(例如可以是第二PUSCH在M个连续时隙(slot)传输;又例如,第二PUSCH可以是有M次名义重传(nominal repetitions))。
具体的,当M=2时,第一SRS资源对应第二PUSCH的第1次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次重传),第二SRS资源对应第二PUSCH的第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第2次重传)。
具体的,当M>2,如果RRC信息元素(IE)配置授权配置(ConfiguredGrantConfig)指示了循环映射(cyclicMapping)(即cyclicMapping被enabled,例如映射模式(mappingPattern)的值为cyclicMapping),第一SRS资源和第二SRS资源分别应用于第二PUSCH的第1次和第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个和第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次和第2次重传),后续相同的映射图案依次重复,直到一共M次传输(the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots)。例如第1-4次重复传输,对应的SRS资源分别为:第一SRS资源,第二SRS资源,第一SRS资源,第二SRS资源。
具体的,当M>2,如果RRC信息元素(IE)配置授权配置(ConfiguredGrantConfig)指示了序列映射(sequentialMapping)(即sequentialMapping被enabled,例如映射模式(mappingPattern)的值为sequentialMapping),第一SRS资源应用于第二PUSCH的第1次和第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个和第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次和第2次重传),第二SRS resource应用于第二PUSCH的第3次和第4次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第3个和第4个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第3次和第4次重传),后续相同的映射图案依次重复,直到一共M次传输(the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots)。例如第1-8次重复传输,对应的SRS资源分别为:第一SRS资源,第一SRS资源,第二SRS资源,第二SRS资源,第一SRS资源,第一SRS资源,第二SRS资源,第二SRS资源。
以上方案可以用于K1=2个TCI状态的情况。也可用于K1=1个TCI状态的情况,此时,第一TCI状态和第二TCI状态是同一个TCI状态,指的是该K1=1个TCI状态,并且使用第一SRS资源和第二SRS资源确定第二PUSCH的传输。
对于K1=1个TCI状态的情况,也可以有另外的方案。
例如,只使用第一SRS资源以及K1=1个TCI状态来进行第二PUSCH传输,一个例子是,使用第一SRS资源以及K1=1个TCI状态来进行第二PUSCH的M次重复传输。因此,可以只使用其中一个SRS资源,降低产品实现复杂度。
再例如,只使用第二SRS资源以及K1=1个TCI状态来进行第二PUSCH传输,一个例子是,使用第二SRS资源以及K1=1个TCI状态来进行第二PUSCH的M次重复传输。因此,可以只使用其中一个SRS资源,降低产品实现复杂度。
在实施例2中一些实现方式中,第一SRS资源集合对应第一配置授权对应的RRC参数rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant中的RRC参数srs-ResourceIndicator,第二SRS资源集合对应第一配置授权对应的RRC参数rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant中的RRC参数srs-ResourceIndicator2。例如第一配置授权对应的RRC参数rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant中的RRC参数srs-ResourceIndicator指示的SRI对应第一SRS资源集合中的某个SRS资源,第一配置授权对应的RRC参数rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant中的RRC参数srs-ResourceIndicator2指示的SRI对应第二SRS资源集合中的某个SRS资源。
在实施例2中一些实现方式中,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第十三指示信息,其中,该第十三指示信息用于指示在第二PUSCH单次传输中,同时根据第一TCI状态和第二TCI状态确定第二PUSCH的传输。例如,终端设备根据第十三指示信息,在CG PUSCH type1中的每次PUSCH传输(如果有多次传输的话)中,均同时根据第一TCI状态和第二TCI状态确定第二PUSCH对应的上行发送 空间滤波器或空间关系。
可选的,该第十三指示信息可以通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE,DCI信令。
可选的,该第十三指示信息可以针对BWP配置的,即该第十三指示信息配置粒度为BWP。
可选的,该第十三指示信息针对第一配置授权配置的,即该第十三指示信息配置粒度为配置授权配置。
可选的,该第十三指示信息是通过RRC参数configuredGrantConfig配置的。
实施例3,终端设备接收第二DCI,其中,该第二DCI用于激活第三PUSCH,该第三PUSCH为CG类型2的PUSCH,该第三PUSCH对应第三SRS资源和/或第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源为该两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,该第四SRS资源为该两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源;以及该终端设备可以根据第三信息确定该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输;其中,该第三信息为以下至少之一:该第三SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第四SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第三SRS资源,该第四SRS资源。
在实施例3中,网络设备可以为终端设备配置1个或多个授权配置(Configured Grant Configuration),例如可以通过RRC信令配置1个BWP上的1个或多个配置授权。为了描述方便,以其中的1个授权配置(第一授权配置)为例,来介绍后续方案。
可选的,第一配置授权是配置授权类型2(configured grant Type 2)。
可选的,当第一配置授权是配置授权类型2时,网络设备针对第一配置授权还在RRC参数配置授权配置(configuredGrantConfig)中不包含RRC上行授权配置(rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant)。
具体例如,第三SRS资源是由第一配置授权对应的RRC参数rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant中的RRC参数SRS资源指示(srs-ResourceIndicator)指示。
具体例如,第四SRS资源是由第一配置授权对应的RRC参数rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant中的RRC参数SRS资源指示2(srs-ResourceIndicator2)指示。
可选地,网络设备还可以为第一配置授权配置以下一项或多项信息(例如通过RRC信令):
频域跳频指示信息,例如slot内跳频(intra-slot hopping),slot之间跳频(inter-slot hopping);
解调参考信号(DMRS)指示信息;
资源分配指示信息,例如时域,和/或频域资源分配;
功率控制参数指示信息;
预编码(precoding)指示信息;
SRS资源指示信息;
重复传输指示信息;
HARQ进程(HARQ process)指示信息。
在实施例3中,当DCI格式0_0或DCI格式0_1激活第一配置授权,从而传输第三PUSCH时,或者传输第一授权配置对应的第三PUSCH时,使用第一授权配置的信息,同时还使用RRC参数中pusch-Config的下列部分或全部信息:
PUSCH的数据扰码标识(dataScramblingIdentityPUSCH);
传输配置(txConfig);
码本子集(codebookSubset);
最大秩(maxRank);
PUSCH上的UCI范围(scaling of UCI-OnPUSCH)。
在实施例3中,当DCI格式0_2激活第一配置授权,从而传输第一配置授权对应的第三PUSCH时,使用第一授权配置的信息,同时还使用RRC参数中pusch-Config的下列部分或全部信息:
PUSCH的数据扰码标识(dataScramblingIdentityPUSCH);
传输配置(txConfig);
码本子集DCI-0-2(codebookSubsetDCI-0-2);
最大秩DCI-0-2(maxRankDCI-0-2);
PUSCH上的UCI范围(scaling of UCI-OnPUSCH),资源分配类型1粒度DCI-0-2(resourceAllocationType1GranularityDCI-0-2)。
在实施例3中,该第二DCI可以是DCI格式0_0或DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2。
在实施例3中,该第二DCI满足下面一个或多个条件:
使用以下参数加扰第二DCI使用的CRC:参数cs-RNTI配置的配置调度无线网络临时标识(Configured Scheduling Radio Network Temporary Identity,CS-RNTI),或者参数g-cs-RNTI配置的组配置调度无线网络临时标识(Group Configured Scheduling Radio Network Temporary Identity, G-CS-RNTI);
第二DCI中新数据指示域设为0;
如果第二DCI中配置授权下行反馈信息(Configured Grant Downlink Feedback Information,CG-DFI)指示域存在,这个域设为0;
第二DCI中时域资源分配指示域指示对应1个起始长度指示值(Start and length indicator value,SLIV)指示的行。
可选地,当只有1个第一配置授权时,激活第一配置授权的DCI中部分域的规定如表1所示。
表1
  DCI格式0_0/0_1/0_2 DCI格式1_0/1_2/4_1 DCI格式1_1/4_2
HARQ进程号 设置为全'0's 设置为全'0's 设置为全'0's
RV 设置为全'0's 设置为全'0's 使能的传输块:设置为全'0's
可选地,当有多个第一配置授权时,激活第一配置授权的DCI中部分域的规定如表2所示。
表2
  DCI格式0_0/0_1/0_2 DCI格式1_0/1_2/4_1 DCI格式1_1/4_2
RV 设置为全'0's 设置为全'0's 使能的传输块:设置为全'0's
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,和/或,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定。因此,可以利用预设规则,根据DCI固定域来确定SRS资源,降低产品实现复杂度。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第一取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第二取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第四SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第三取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第四取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定。
可选的,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,若第二DCI中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第一取值(例如codepoint为“00”),则该第三PUSCH对应第三SRS资源。
可选的,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,若第二DCI中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第二取值(例如codepoint为“01”),则该第三PUSCH对应第四SRS资源。
可选的,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,若第二DCI中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第三取值(例如codepoint为“10”),则该第三PUSCH对应第三SRS资源和第四SRS资源,其中第三SRS资源由第二DCI中“SRS resource indicator”指示域确定的,第四SRS资源由第二DCI中“Second SRS resource indicator”指示域确定的。
可选的,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,若第二DCI中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第四取值(例如codepoint为“11”),则该第三PUSCH对应第三SRS资源和第四SRS资源,其中第四SRS资源由第二DCI中“SRS resource indicator”指示域确定的,第三SRS资源由第二DCI中“Second SRS resource indicator”指示域确定的。
因此,可以基于第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域来确定第三PUSCH对应的SRS资源,增加系统的灵活性。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第一取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第二取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第四SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示 第三取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第四取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定。
可选的,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,若第二DCI中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第一取值(例如codepoint为“00”),则该第三PUSCH对应第三SRS资源。
可选的,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,若第二DCI中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第二取值(例如codepoint为“01”),则该第三PUSCH对应第四SRS资源。
可选的,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,若第二DCI中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第三取值(例如codepoint为“10”),则该第三PUSCH对应第三SRS资源和第四SRS资源,其中第三SRS资源由第二DCI中“SRS resource indicator”指示域确定的,第四SRS资源由第二DCI中“Second SRS resource indicator”指示域确定的。
可选的,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,若第二DCI中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第四取值(例如codepoint为“11”),则该第三PUSCH对应第三SRS资源和第四SRS资源,其中第三SRS资源由第二DCI中“SRS resource indicator”指示域确定的,第四SRS资源由第二DCI中“Second SRS resource indicator”指示域确定的。
因此,可以基于第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域来确定第三PUSCH对应的SRS资源,增加系统的灵活性。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第四SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联。因此,可以将SRS资源直接关联TCI状态,减少关联层级,降低关联复杂度。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第四SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第三SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联,该第四SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联。因此,可以利用SRS资源集合与TCI状态的关联关系,可以保持不同PUSCH方式下处理的一致性,减少协议复杂度。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第四SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第三SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联,该第四SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联。因此,可以利用SRS资源集合与TCI状态的关联关系,可以保持不同PUSCH方式下处理的一致性,减少协议复杂度。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,在该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源的情况下,该终端设备根据该第一TCI状态、该第三SRS资源、该第二TCI状态和该第四SRS资源,确定该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源,该第三SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源,该终端设备根据该第一TCI状态和该第三SRS资源,确定该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,在K1=1且该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源的情况下,该终端设备根据该第三SRS资源,以及该K1=1个TCI状态,确定该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,在K1=1且该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源的情况下,该终端设备根据该第四SRS资源,以及该K1=1个TCI状态,确定该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,如果第三PUSCH需要重复传输M次(例如可以是第三PUSCH在M个连续时隙(slot)传输;又例如,第三PUSCH可以是有M次名义重传(nominal repetitions))。
在一些实现方式中,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,在DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第一取值(例如codepoint为“00”),第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的M次重复传输。
在一些实现方式中,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,在DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第二取值(例如codepoint为“01”),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的M次重复传输。
在一些实现方式中,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,在DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第三取值(例如codepoint为“10”)时可以基于M的取值分为如下几种情况下:
当M=2时,第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第1次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次重传),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第2次重传)。
当M>2,如果RRC IE PUSCH-Config指示了循环映射(cyclicMapping)(即cyclicMapping被enabled),第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第1次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次重传),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第2次重传),后续相同的映射图案依次重复,直到一共M次传输(the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots)。例如第1-4次重复传输,对应的SRS资源集合分别为:第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合。
当M>2,如果RRC IE PUSCH-Config指示了序列映射(sequentialMapping)(即sequentialMapping被enabled),第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第1次和第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个和第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次和第2次重传),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第3次和第4次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第3个和第4个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第3次和第4次重传),后续相同的映射图案依次重复,直到一共M次传输(the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots)。例如第1-8次重复传输,对应的SRS资源集合分别为:第一SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合。
在一些实现方式中,当第二DCI是DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2时,在DCI format 0_1或DCI format 0_2中的SRS resource set indicator指示域指示第四取值(例如codepoint为“11”)时可以基于M的取值分为如下几种情况下:
当M=2时,第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第1次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第1个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第1次重传),第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第2次传输(例如M个连续slot中的第2个slot,或者M个名义重传中的第2次重传)。
当M>2,如果RRC IE PUSCH-Config指示了cyclicMapping(即cyclicMapping被enabled),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第1次传输,第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第2次传输,后续相同的映射图案依次重复,直到一共M次传输(the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots)。例如第1-4次重复传输,对应的SRS资源集合分别为:第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合。
当M>2,如果RRC IE PUSCH-Config指示了sequentialMapping(即sequentialMapping被enabled),第二SRS资源集合以及对应的第二TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第1次和第2次传输,第一SRS资源集合以及对应的第一TCI状态用于第三PUSCH的第3次和第4次传输,后续相同的映射图案依次重复,直到一共M次传输(the same mapping pattern continues to the remaining slots of the M consecutive slots)。例如第1-8次重复传输,对应的SRS资源集合分别为:第二SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第二SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合,第一SRS资源集合。
以上方案可以用于K1=2个TCI状态的情况。也可用于K1=1个TCI状态的情况,此时,第一TCI状态和第二TCI状态是同一个TCI状态,指的是该K1=1个TCI状态,并且使用第三SRS资源和第四SRS资源确定第三PUSCH的传输。
对于K1=1个TCI状态的情况,也可以有另外的方案。
例如,只使用第三SRS资源以及该K1=1个TCI状态来进行第三PUSCH传输,一个例子是,使用第三SRS资源以及该K1=1个TCI状态来进行第三PUSCH的M次重复传输。因此,可以只使用其中一个SRS资源,降低产品实现复杂度。
再例如,只使用第四SRS资源以及K1=1个TCI状态来进行第三PUSCH传输,一个例子是,使用第四SRS资源以及该K1=1个TCI状态来进行第三PUSCH的M次重复传输。因此,可以只使用其中一个SRS资源,降低产品实现复杂度。
可选的,第一SRS资源集合对应第二DCI中的“SRS resource indicator”指示域,第二SRS资源集合对应第二DCI中的“Second SRS resource indicator”指示域。例如第二DCI中的“SRS resource indicator”指示域指示的SRI对应第一SRS资源集合中的某个SRS资源,第二DCI中的“Second SRS resource indicator”指示域指示的SRI对应第二SRS资源集合中的某个SRS资源。
在实施例3中一些实现方式中,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第十四指示信息,其中,该第十四指示信息指示在第三PUSCH单次传输中,同时根据第一TCI状态和第二TCI状态确定第三PUSCH的传输。例如,终端设备根据第十四指示信息,在CG PUSCH type2中的每次PUSCH传输(如果有多次传输的话)中,都同时根据第一TCI状态和第二TCI状态确定第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
可选的,第十四指示信息可以通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE,DCI信令。
可选的,第十四指示信息针对BWP配置的,即该第十四指示信息配置粒度为BWP。
可选的,第十四指示信息针对第一配置授权配置的,即该第十四指示信息配置粒度为配置授权配置。
可选的,第十四指示信息是通过RRC参数configuredGrantConfig配置的。
可选的,第十三指示信息和第十四指示信息是对应同一RRC参数。
在一些实施例中,该终端设备根据上述方案确定的第一SRS资源集合,和/或,第二SRS资源集合,以及每个SRS资源集合对应的TCI状态(例如第一TCI状态,和/或,第二TCI状态)确定上行传输。
在一些实施例中,该终端设备根据上述方案确定的第一SRS资源,和/或,第二SRS资源,以及每个SRS资源对应的TCI状态(例如第一TCI状态,和/或,第二TCI状态)确定上行传输。
在一些实施例中,该终端设备根据上述方案确定的第三SRS资源,和/或,第四SRS资源,以及每个SRS资源对应的TCI状态(例如第一TCI状态,和/或,第二TCI状态)确定上行传输。
因此,在本申请实施例中,第一SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,也即,明确了第一SRS资源集合和/或第二SRS资源集合关联的TCI状态,从而可以基于第一SRS资源集合及其关联的TCI状态确定与第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系,和/或,基于第二SRS资源集合及其关联的TCI状态确定与第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
或者,在本申请实施例中,两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,也即,明确了两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与TCI状态的关联关系,从而可以基于SRS资源及其关联的TCI状态,确定与SRS资源关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
上文结合图5,详细描述了本申请的方法实施例,下文结合图6至图10,详细描述本申请的装置实施例,应理解,装置实施例与方法实施例相互对应,类似的描述可以参照方法实施例。
图5示出了根据本申请实施例的终端设备300的示意性框图。如图5所示,该终端设备300包括:
通信单元310,用于接收第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一探测参考信号SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合的用途均为用于基于码本或非码本的物理上行共享信道PUSCH;
其中,该第一SRS资源集合与K1个传输配置指示TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;或者,该第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;
其中,该K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前激活的TCI状态,K1为正整数。
在一些实施例中,在该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1>1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;和/或,
在该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且该K1个TCI状态仅包括第一TCI状态的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合均与该第一TCI状态关联;或者,该第一SRS资源集合与该第一TCI状态关联,且该第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在该两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1>1的情况下,该两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的一个TCI状态关联,该两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的另一个TCI状态关联;
和/或,
在该两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1=1的情况下,该两个SRS资源均与该K1个TCI状态中的一个TCI状态关联;或者,该两个SRS资源的一个SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且该两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源未关联TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态标识确定,和/或,该第二TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态标识确定。
在一些实施例中,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置信息确定,和/或,该第二TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置信息确定;
其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该K1个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;
或者,
该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一TCI状态由网络设备通过第三指示信息指示,和/或,该第二TCI状态由网络设备通过第四指示信息指示。
在一些实施例中,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,或者,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,或者,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,或者,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;
其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该K1个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,或者,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,或者,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,或者,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;
其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该K1个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在该终端设备未获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
在该终端设备未获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在该终端设备未获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置 该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
在该终端设备未获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在该第三指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该第三指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
在该第三指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在该第三指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在该第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
在该第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在该第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第三指示信息包含在该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中,和/或,该第四指示信息包含在该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中。
在一些实施例中,在该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中不包含跟随统一TCI状态的SRS followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含去使能的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,该终端设备忽略该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS;和/或,
在该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中不包含followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含去使能的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,该终端设备忽略该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态确定,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第二TCI状态确定;和/或,
在K1>1的情况下,与该第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态和/或该第一SRS资源集合确定,和/或,与该第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第二TCI状态和/或该第二SRS资源集合确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1=1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于该第一TCI状态确定;或者,该第一SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑该第二SRS资源集合;和/或,
在K1=1的情况下,与该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于该第一TCI状态和/或该第一SRS资源集合确定,和/或,与该第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态和该第一SRS资源集合确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑该第二SRS资源集合。
在一些实施例中,该K1个TCI状态属于N个TCI状态;
其中,该N个TCI状态中的至少部分TCI状态为上行传输对应的激活的TCI状态,该N个TCI状态由网络设备配置或指示,N为正整数,且K1≤N。
在一些实施例中,该K1个TCI状态由网络设备通过第五指示信息指示。
在一些实施例中,该第五指示信息用于指示该K1个TCI状态为按照第一顺序依次从该N个TCI状态选取的K1个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第一顺序为TCI状态标识从小到大的顺序,或者,该第一顺序为TCI状态标识从大到小的顺序。
在一些实施例中,该第五指示信息用于指示该K1个TCI状态为按照该N个TCI状态在第二指示 信息中的位置顺序依次选取的K1个TCI状态;
其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该N个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该N个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中的位置顺序为从前到后的顺序,或者,该N个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中的位置顺序为从后到前的顺序。
在一些实施例中,该第五指示信息通过以下之一承载:无线资源控制RRC信令,媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,下行控制信息DCI信令。
在一些实施例中,该N个TCI状态由网络设备通过第六指示信息指示;或者,
该N个TCI状态由网络设备通过第二指示信息指示;或者,
该N个TCI状态为基于第二指示信息从网络设备通过第六指示信息指示的TCI状态中确定的;
其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该N个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第六指示信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令,DCI信令。
在一些实施例中,该第二指示信息通过第一MAC CE信令承载;
其中,该第一MAC CE信令还包括以下至少之一:服务小区指示信息,下行带宽部分BWP指示信息,上行BWP指示信息,一个或多个TCI数量指示域,一个或多个TCI类型指示域,一个或多个TCI状态指示域。
在一些实施例中,该终端设备300还包括处理单元320;
该通信单元310还用于接收第一DCI,其中,该第一DCI用于调度第一PUSCH;
该处理单元320用于根据第一信息确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系;或者,根据第一信息确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输;
其中,该第一信息为以下至少之一:该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态,该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态,该第一SRS资源集合,该第二SRS资源集合;
其中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合与该第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该第二TCI状态关联;
其中,在K1=1,且该K1个TCI状态仅包括第一TCI状态的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合均与该第一TCI状态关联;或者,该第一SRS资源集合与该第一TCI状态关联,且该第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该处理单元320具体用于:
在该第一DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,根据该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中预设的TCI状态确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系;或者,
在该第一DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,根据该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中网络设备指示的TCI状态确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该处理单元320具体用于:
在该第一DCI为DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2的情况下,根据该第一TCI状态、该第一SRS资源集合、该第二TCI状态和该第二SRS资源集合,确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输。
在一些实施例中,在K1=1的情况下,该处理单元320具体用于:
根据该第一SRS资源集合和该第一TCI状态,确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输;或者,
根据该第二SRS资源集合和该第一TCI状态,确定该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输。
在一些实施例中,该终端设备300还包括处理单元320;
该处理单元320用于根据第二信息确定第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输;
其中,该第二PUSCH为配置授权CG类型1的PUSCH,该第二PUSCH对应第一SRS资源和/或第二SRS资源,该第一SRS资源为该两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,该第二SRS资源为该两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源;
其中,该第二信息为以下至少之一:该第一SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第二SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第一SRS资源,该第二SRS资源。
在一些实施例中,若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源,该第一SRS资源 与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;或者,
若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源,该第一SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第二SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第一SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联;或者,
若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源,该第一SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第二SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第一SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联。
在一些实施例中,该处理单元320具体用于:
根据该第一TCI状态、该第一SRS资源、该第二TCI状态和该第二SRS资源,确定该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输。
在一些实施例中,若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源,该第一SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联。
在一些实施例中,该处理单元320具体用于:
根据该第一TCI状态和该第一SRS资源,确定该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输。
在一些实施例中,在K1=1且该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源的情况下,该处理单元320具体用于:
根据该第一SRS资源,以及该K1=1个TCI状态,确定该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输;或者,
根据该第二SRS资源,以及该K1=1个TCI状态,确定该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输。
在一些实施例中,该终端设备300还包括处理单元320;
该通信单元310还用于接收第二DCI,其中,该第二DCI用于激活第三PUSCH,该第三PUSCH为CG类型2的PUSCH,该第三PUSCH对应第三SRS资源和/或第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源为该两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,该第四SRS资源为该两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源;
该处理单元320用于根据第三信息确定该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输;
其中,该第三信息为以下至少之一:该第三SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第四SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第三SRS资源,该第四SRS资源。
在一些实施例中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,和/或,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定。
在一些实施例中,在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源。
在一些实施例中,在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第一取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第二取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第四SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第三取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第四取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定。
在一些实施例中,在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第一取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第二取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第四SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第三取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第四取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定。
在一些实施例中,若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第四SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;或者,
若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第四SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第三SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联,该第四SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联;或者,
若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第四SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第三SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联,该第四SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联。
在一些实施例中,该处理单元320具体用于:
根据该第一TCI状态、该第三SRS资源、该第二TCI状态和该第四SRS资源,确定该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输。
在一些实施例中,若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源,该第三SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联。
在一些实施例中,该处理单元320具体用于:
根据该第一TCI状态和该第三SRS资源,确定该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输。
在一些实施例中,在K1=1且该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源的情况下,该处理单元320具体用于:
根据该第三SRS资源,以及该K1=1个TCI状态,确定该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输;或者,
根据该第四SRS资源,以及该K1=1个TCI状态,确定该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输。
在一些实施例中,该通信单元310还用于发送第一终端能力信息;
其中,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z1为正整数,且Z1>1。
在一些实施例中,该第一终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
在一些实施例中,该第一终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
在一些实施例中,该通信单元310还用于发送第二终端能力信息;
其中,该第二终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持CG PUSCH。
在一些实施例中,该第二终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
在一些实施例中,该第二终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
在一些实施例中,该第二终端能力信息与第一终端能力信息通过同一信令传输,或者,该第二终端能力信息与第一终端能力信息通过不同的信令传输;
其中,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行 重复传输,或者,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z1为正整数,且Z1>1。
在一些实施例中,该通信单元310还用于发送第三终端能力信息;
其中,该第三终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第三终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第三终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z2为正整数,且Z2>1。
在一些实施例中,该第三终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
在一些实施例中,该第三终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
在一些实施例中,该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中指示了跟踪统一的TCI状态,该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中指示了跟踪统一的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为联合TCI状态,或者,该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为上行TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,上述通信单元可以是通信接口或收发器,或者是通信芯片或者片上系统的输入输出接口。上述处理单元可以是一个或多个处理器。
应理解,根据本申请实施例的终端设备300可对应于本申请方法实施例中的终端设备,并且终端设备300中的各个单元的上述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图5所示方法200中终端设备的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
图7示出了根据本申请实施例的网络设备400的示意性框图。如图7所示,该网络设备400包括:
通信单元410,用于发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一探测参考信号SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合的用途均为用于基于码本或非码本的物理上行共享信道PUSCH;
其中,该第一SRS资源集合与K1个传输配置指示TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;或者,该第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;
其中,该K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前激活的TCI状态,K1为正整数。
在一些实施例中,在该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1>1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;和/或,
在该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且该K1个TCI状态仅包括第一TCI状态的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合均与该第一TCI状态关联;或者,该第一SRS资源集合与该第一TCI状态关联,且该第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在该两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1>1的情况下,该两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的一个TCI状态关联,该两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的另一个TCI状态关联;
和/或,
在该两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1=1的情况下,该两个SRS资源均与该K1个TCI状态中的一个TCI状态关联;或者,该两个SRS资源的一个SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且该两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源未关联TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态标识确定,和/或,该第二TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态标识确定。
在一些实施例中,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1 个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置信息确定,和/或,该第二TCI状态基于该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置信息确定;
其中,该第二指示信息为该网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该K1个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;
或者,
该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态,和/或,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一TCI状态由该网络设备通过第三指示信息指示,和/或,该第二TCI状态由该网络设备通过第四指示信息指示。
在一些实施例中,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,或者,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,或者,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,或者,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;
其中,该第二指示信息为该网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该K1个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,或者,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,或者,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,或者,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;
其中,该第二指示信息为该网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该K1个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在终端设备未获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
在终端设备未获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在终端设备未获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
在终端设备未获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备未配置该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在该终端设备获取到该第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在该网络设备配置了该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在该第三指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该第三指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
在该第三指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在该第三指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第一TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在该第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在该第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
在该第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI 状态;和/或,在该第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,该第二TCI状态为该K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第三指示信息包含在该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中,和/或,该第四指示信息包含在该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中。
在一些实施例中,在该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含该第三指示信息的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中不包含跟随统一TCI状态的SRS followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含去使能的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS;和/或,
在该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含该第四指示信息的情况下,该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中不包含followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含去使能的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态确定,和/或,该第二SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第二TCI状态确定;和/或,
在K1>1的情况下,与该第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态和/或该第一SRS资源集合确定,和/或,与该第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第二TCI状态和/或该第二SRS资源集合确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1=1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于该第一TCI状态确定;或者,该第一SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑该第二SRS资源集合;和/或,
在K1=1的情况下,与该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于该第一TCI状态和/或该第一SRS资源集合确定,和/或,与该第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态和该第一SRS资源集合确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑该第二SRS资源集合。
在一些实施例中,该K1个TCI状态属于N个TCI状态;
其中,该N个TCI状态中的至少部分TCI状态为上行传输对应的激活的TCI状态,该N个TCI状态由网络设备配置或指示,N为正整数,且K1≤N。
在一些实施例中,该K1个TCI状态由网络设备通过第五指示信息指示。
在一些实施例中,该第五指示信息用于指示该K1个TCI状态为按照第一顺序依次从该N个TCI状态选取的K1个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第一顺序为TCI状态标识从小到大的顺序,或者,该第一顺序为TCI状态标识从大到小的顺序。
在一些实施例中,该第五指示信息用于指示该K1个TCI状态为按照该N个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置顺序依次选取的K1个TCI状态;
其中,该第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该N个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该N个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中的位置顺序为从前到后的顺序,或者,该N个TCI状态在该第二指示信息中的位置顺序为从后到前的顺序。
在一些实施例中,该第五指示信息通过以下之一承载:无线资源控制RRC信令,媒体接入控制层控制单元MAC CE信令,下行控制信息DCI信令。
在一些实施例中,该N个TCI状态由该网络设备通过第六指示信息指示;或者,
该N个TCI状态由该网络设备通过第二指示信息指示;或者,
该N个TCI状态为基于第二指示信息从该网络设备通过第六指示信息指示的TCI状态中确定的;
其中,该第二指示信息为该网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且该第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括该N个TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该第六指示信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令,DCI信令。
在一些实施例中,该第二指示信息通过第一MAC CE信令承载;
其中,该第一MAC CE信令还包括以下至少之一:服务小区指示信息,下行带宽部分BWP指示信息,上行BWP指示信息,一个或多个TCI数量指示域,一个或多个TCI类型指示域,一个或多个TCI状态指示域。
在一些实施例中,该通信单元410还用于发送第一DCI,其中,该第一DCI用于调度第一PUSCH;
其中,该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于第一信息确定;或者,该第一 PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输基于第一信息确定;
其中,该第一信息为以下至少之一:该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态,该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态,该第一SRS资源集合,该第二SRS资源集合;
其中,在K1>1的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合与该第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该第二TCI状态关联;
其中,在K1=1,且该K1个TCI状态仅包括第一TCI状态的情况下,该第一SRS资源集合和该第二SRS资源集合均与该第一TCI状态关联;或者,该第一SRS资源集合与该第一TCI状态关联,且该第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1,且该第一DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中预设的TCI状态确定;或者,
在K1>1,且该第一DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于该第一TCI状态和该第二TCI状态中该网络设备指示的TCI状态确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1>1,且该第一DCI为DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2的情况下,该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输基于该第一TCI状态、该第一SRS资源集合、该第二TCI状态和该第二SRS资源集合确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1=1的情况下,该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输基于该第一SRS资源集合和该第一TCI状态确定;或者,
在K1=1的情况下,该第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第一PUSCH的传输基于该第二SRS资源集合和该第一TCI状态确定。
在一些实施例中,第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输基于第二信息确定;
其中,该第二PUSCH为配置授权CG类型1的PUSCH,该第二PUSCH对应第一SRS资源和/或第二SRS资源,该第一SRS资源为该两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,该第二SRS资源为该两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源;
其中,该第二信息为以下至少之一:该第一SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第二SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第一SRS资源,该第二SRS资源。
在一些实施例中,若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源,该第一SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;或者,
若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源,该第一SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第二SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第一SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联;或者,
若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源,该第一SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第二SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第一SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联。
在一些实施例中,该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输基于该第一TCI状态、该第一SRS资源、该第二TCI状态和该第二SRS资源确定。
在一些实施例中,若该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源,该第一SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联。
在一些实施例中,该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输基于该第一TCI状态和该第一SRS资源确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1=1且该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源的情况下,该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输基于该第一SRS资源和该K1=1个TCI状态确定;或者,
在K1=1且该第二PUSCH对应该第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源的情况下,该第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第二PUSCH的传输基于该第二SRS资源和该K1=1个TCI状态确定。
在一些实施例中,该通信单元410还用于发送第二DCI,其中,该第二DCI用于激活第三PUSCH,该第三PUSCH为CG类型2的PUSCH,该第三PUSCH对应第三SRS资源和/或第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源为该两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,该第四SRS资源为该两个SRS资源中的另一 个SRS资源;
其中,该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输基于第三信息确定;
其中,该第三信息为以下至少之一:该第三SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第四SRS资源关联的TCI状态,该第三SRS资源,该第四SRS资源。
在一些实施例中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,和/或,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定。
在一些实施例中,在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源。
在一些实施例中,在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第一取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第二取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第四SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第三取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第四取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定。
在一些实施例中,在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第一取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第二取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第四SRS资源;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第三取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定;或者,
在该第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且该第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第四取值的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,其中,该第三SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,该第四SRS资源由该第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定。
在一些实施例中,若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第四SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;或者,
若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第四SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第三SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联,该第四SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联;或者,
若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源,该第三SRS资源属于该第二SRS资源集合,该第四SRS资源属于该第一SRS资源集合,该第一SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,该第二SRS资源集合与该K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则该第三SRS资源与该第二TCI状态关联,该第四SRS资源与该第一TCI状态关联。
在一些实施例中,该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输基于该第一TCI状态、该第三SRS资源、该第二TCI状态和该第四SRS资源确定。
在一些实施例中,若该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源,该第三SRS资源与该K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联。
在一些实施例中,该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输基于该第一TCI状态和该第三SRS资源确定。
在一些实施例中,在K1=1且该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输基于该第三SRS资 源和该K1=1个TCI状态确定;或者,
在K1=1且该第三PUSCH对应该第三SRS资源和该第四SRS资源的情况下,该第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及该第三PUSCH的传输基于该第四SRS资源和该K1=1个TCI状态确定。
在一些实施例中,该通信单元410还用于接收第一终端能力信息;
其中,该第一终端能力信息用于指示终端设备支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第一终端能力信息用于指示终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第一终端能力信息用于指示终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z1为正整数,且Z1>1。
在一些实施例中,该第一终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
在一些实施例中,该第一终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
在一些实施例中,该通信单元410还用于接收第二终端能力信息;
其中,该第二终端能力信息用于指示终端设备支持CG PUSCH。
在一些实施例中,该第二终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
在一些实施例中,该第二终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
在一些实施例中,该第二终端能力信息与第一终端能力信息通过同一信令传输,或者,该第二终端能力信息与第一终端能力信息通过不同的信令传输;
其中,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第一终端能力信息用于指示该终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z1为正整数,且Z1>1。
在一些实施例中,该通信单元410还用于接收第三终端能力信息;
其中,该第三终端能力信息用于指示终端设备支持Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第三终端能力信息用于指示终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,该第三终端能力信息用于指示终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z2为正整数,且Z2>1。
在一些实施例中,该第三终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
在一些实施例中,该第三终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
在一些实施例中,该第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中指示了跟踪统一的TCI状态,该第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中指示了跟踪统一的TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为联合TCI状态,或者,该K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为上行TCI状态。
在一些实施例中,上述通信单元可以是通信接口或收发器,或者是通信芯片或者片上系统的输入输出接口。上述处理单元可以是一个或多个处理器。
应理解,根据本申请实施例的网络设备400可对应于本申请方法实施例中的网络设备,并且网络设备400中的各个单元的上述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图5所示方法200中网络设备的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
图8是本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备500示意性结构图。图8所示的通信设备500包括处理器510,处理器510可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。
在一些实施例中,如图8所示,通信设备500还可以包括存储器520。其中,处理器510可以从存储器520中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。
其中,存储器520可以是独立于处理器510的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器510中。
在一些实施例中,如图8所示,通信设备500还可以包括收发器530,处理器510可以控制该收 发器530与其他设备进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备发送信息或数据,或接收其他设备发送的信息或数据。
其中,收发器530可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器530还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。
在一些实施例中,处理器510可以实现终端设备中的处理单元的功能,或者,处理器510可以实现网络设备中的处理单元的功能,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中,收发器530可以实现终端设备中的通信单元的功能,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中,收发器530可以实现网络设备中的通信单元的功能,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中,该通信设备500具体可为本申请实施例的网络设备,并且该通信设备500可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中,该通信设备500具体可为本申请实施例的终端设备,并且该通信设备500可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
图9是本申请实施例的装置的示意性结构图。图9所示的装置600包括处理器610,处理器610可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。
在一些实施例中,如图9所示,装置600还可以包括存储器620。其中,处理器610可以从存储器620中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。
其中,存储器620可以是独立于处理器610的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器610中。
在一些实施例中,该装置600还可以包括输入接口630。其中,处理器610可以控制该输入接口630与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以获取其他设备或芯片发送的信息或数据。可选地,处理器610可以位于芯片内或芯片外。
在一些实施例中,处理器610可以实现终端设备中的处理单元的功能,或者,处理器610可以实现网络设备中的处理单元的功能,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中,输入接口630可以实现终端设备中的通信单元的功能,或者,输入接口630可以实现网络设备中的通信单元的功能。
在一些实施例中,该装置600还可以包括输出接口640。其中,处理器610可以控制该输出接口640与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备或芯片输出信息或数据。可选地,处理器610可以位于芯片内或芯片外。
在一些实施例中,输出接口640可以实现终端设备中的通信单元的功能,或者,输出接口640可以实现网络设备中的通信单元的功能。
在一些实施例中,该装置可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该装置可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中,该装置可应用于本申请实施例中的终端设备,并且该装置可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中,本申请实施例提到的装置也可以是芯片。例如可以是系统级芯片,系统芯片,芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。
图10是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统700的示意性框图。如图10所示,该通信系统700包括终端设备710和网络设备720。
其中,该终端设备710可以用于实现上述方法中由终端设备实现的相应的功能,以及该网络设备720可以用于实现上述方法中由网络设备实现的相应的功能,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
应理解,本申请实施例的处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、 电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
应理解,上述存储器为示例性但不是限制性说明,例如,本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synch link DRAM,SLDRAM)以及直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)等等。也就是说,本申请实施例中的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序。
在一些实施例中,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的终端设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令。
在一些实施例中,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的终端设备,并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序。
在一些实施例中,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的终端设备,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。针对这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请 各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (132)

  1. 一种无线通信的方法,其特征在于,应用于终端设备,所述方法包括:
    接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一探测参考信号SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合的用途均为用于基于码本或非码本的物理上行共享信道PUSCH;
    其中,所述第一SRS资源集合与K1个传输配置指示TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,所述第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;或者,所述第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;
    其中,所述K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前激活的TCI状态,K1为正整数。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1>1的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;和/或,
    在所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且所述K1个TCI状态仅包括第一TCI状态的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合均与所述第一TCI状态关联;或者,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述第一TCI状态关联,且所述第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态。
  3. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1>1的情况下,所述两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的一个TCI状态关联,所述两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的另一个TCI状态关联;和/或,
    在所述两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1=1的情况下,所述两个SRS资源均与所述K1个TCI状态中的一个TCI状态关联;或者,所述两个SRS资源的一个SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且所述两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源未关联TCI状态。
  4. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1>1的情况下,所述第一TCI状态基于所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态标识确定,和/或,所述第二TCI状态基于所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态标识确定。
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,和/或,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
    所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,和/或,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
  6. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1>1的情况下,所述第一TCI状态基于所述K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置信息确定,和/或,所述第二TCI状态基于所述K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置信息确定;
    其中,所述第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且所述第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括所述K1个TCI状态。
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,和/或,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;或者,
    所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态,和/或,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态。
  8. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1>1的情况下,所述第一TCI状态由网络设备通过第三指示信息指示,和/或,所述第二TCI状态由网络设备通过第四指示信息指示。
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,或者,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,或者,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,或者,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在第二指 示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;
    其中,所述第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且所述第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括所述K1个TCI状态。
  10. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,或者,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,或者,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,或者,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;
    其中,所述第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且所述第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括所述K1个TCI状态。
  11. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述终端设备未获取到所述第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备未配置所述第三指示信息的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在所述终端设备获取到所述第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备配置了所述第三指示信息的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
    在所述终端设备未获取到所述第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备未配置所述第三指示信息的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在所述终端设备获取到所述第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备配置了所述第三指示信息的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
  12. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述终端设备未获取到所述第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备未配置所述第四指示信息的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在所述终端设备获取到所述第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备配置了所述第四指示信息的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
    在所述终端设备未获取到所述第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备未配置所述第四指示信息的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在所述终端设备获取到所述第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备配置了所述第四指示信息的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
  13. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第三指示信息为第一取值的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在所述第三指示信息为第二取值的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
    在所述第三指示信息为第一取值的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在所述第三指示信息为第二取值的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
  14. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在所述第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
    在所述第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在所述第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
  15. 如权利要求8至14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三指示信息包含在所述第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中,和/或,所述第四指示信息包含在所述第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中。
  16. 如权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含所述第三指示信息的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中不包含跟随统一TCI状态的SRS followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,所述第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含去使能的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,所述终端设备忽略所述第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS;和/或,
    在所述第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含所述第四指示信息的情况下,所述第二SRS资源集 合的配置信息中不包含followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,所述第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含去使能的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,所述终端设备忽略所述第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS。
  17. 如权利要求2、4至16中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1>1的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第一TCI状态确定,和/或,所述第二SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第二TCI状态确定;和/或,
    在K1>1的情况下,与所述第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第一TCI状态和/或所述第一SRS资源集合确定,和/或,与所述第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第二TCI状态和/或所述第二SRS资源集合确定。
  18. 如权利要求2、4至16中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1=1的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于所述第一TCI状态确定;或者,所述第一SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第一TCI状态确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑所述第二SRS资源集合;
    和/或,
    在K1=1的情况下,与所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于所述第一TCI状态和/或所述第一SRS资源集合确定,和/或,与所述第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第一TCI状态和所述第一SRS资源集合确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑所述第二SRS资源集合。
  19. 如权利要求1至18中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述K1个TCI状态属于N个TCI状态;
    其中,所述N个TCI状态中的至少部分TCI状态为上行传输对应的激活的TCI状态,所述N个TCI状态由网络设备配置或指示,N为正整数,且K1≤N。
  20. 如权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述K1个TCI状态由网络设备通过第五指示信息指示。
  21. 如权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述K1个TCI状态为按照第一顺序依次从所述N个TCI状态选取的K1个TCI状态。
  22. 如权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一顺序为TCI状态标识从小到大的顺序,或者,所述第一顺序为TCI状态标识从大到小的顺序。
  23. 如权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第五指示信息用于指示所述K1个TCI状态为按照所述N个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置顺序依次选取的K1个TCI状态;
    其中,所述第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且所述第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括所述N个TCI状态。
  24. 如权利要求23所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述N个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中的位置顺序为从前到后的顺序,或者,所述N个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中的位置顺序为从后到前的顺序。
  25. 如权利要求20至24中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第五指示信息通过以下之一承载:无线资源控制RRC信令,媒体接入控制层控制单元MACCE信令,下行控制信息DCI信令。
  26. 如权利要求19至25中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述N个TCI状态由网络设备通过第六指示信息指示;或者,
    所述N个TCI状态由网络设备通过第二指示信息指示;或者,
    所述N个TCI状态为基于第二指示信息从网络设备通过第六指示信息指示的TCI状态中确定的;
    其中,所述第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且所述第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括所述N个TCI状态。
  27. 如权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第六指示信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令,DCI信令。
  28. 如权利要求6、7、9、10、23、24、26或27所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第二指示信息通过第一MAC CE信令承载;
    其中,所述第一MAC CE信令还包括以下至少之一:服务小区指示信息,下行带宽部分BWP指 示信息,上行BWP指示信息,一个或多个TCI数量指示域,一个或多个TCI类型指示域,一个或多个TCI状态指示域。
  29. 如权利要求1至28中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    接收第一DCI,其中,所述第一DCI用于调度第一PUSCH;
    根据第一信息确定所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系;或者,根据第一信息确定所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第一PUSCH的传输;
    其中,所述第一信息为以下至少之一:所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态,所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态,所述第一SRS资源集合,所述第二SRS资源集合;
    其中,在K1>1的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述第二TCI状态关联;
    其中,在K1=1,且所述K1个TCI状态仅包括第一TCI状态的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合均与所述第一TCI状态关联;或者,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述第一TCI状态关联,且所述第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态。
  30. 如权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,在K1>1的情况下,所述根据第一信息确定所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系,包括:
    在所述第一DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,根据所述第一TCI状态和所述第二TCI状态中预设的TCI状态确定所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系;或者,
    在所述第一DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,根据所述第一TCI状态和所述第二TCI状态中网络设备指示的TCI状态确定所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系。
  31. 如权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,在K1>1的情况下,所述根据第一信息确定所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第一PUSCH的传输,包括:
    在所述第一DCI为DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2的情况下,根据所述第一TCI状态、所述第一SRS资源集合、所述第二TCI状态和所述第二SRS资源集合,确定所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第一PUSCH的传输。
  32. 如权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,在K1=1的情况下,所述根据第一信息确定所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第一PUSCH的传输,包括:
    根据所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第一TCI状态,确定所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第一PUSCH的传输;或者,
    根据所述第二SRS资源集合和所述第一TCI状态,确定所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第一PUSCH的传输。
  33. 如权利要求1至28中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    根据第二信息确定第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输;
    其中,所述第二PUSCH为配置授权CG类型1的PUSCH,所述第二PUSCH对应第一SRS资源和/或第二SRS资源,所述第一SRS资源为所述两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,所述第二SRS资源为所述两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源;
    其中,所述第二信息为以下至少之一:所述第一SRS资源关联的TCI状态,所述第二SRS资源关联的TCI状态,所述第一SRS资源,所述第二SRS资源。
  34. 如权利要求33所述的方法,其特征在于,
    若所述第二PUSCH对应所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源,所述第一SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;或者,
    若所述第二PUSCH对应所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源,所述第一SRS资源属于所述第一SRS资源集合,所述第二SRS资源属于所述第二SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则所述第一SRS资源与所述第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源与所述第二TCI状态关联;或者,
    若所述第二PUSCH对应所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源,所述第一SRS资源属于所述第二SRS资源集合,所述第二SRS资源属于所述第一SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则所述第一SRS资源与所述第二TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源与所述第一TCI状态关联。
  35. 如权利要求34所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据第二信息确定第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输,包括:
    根据所述第一TCI状态、所述第一SRS资源、所述第二TCI状态和所述第二SRS资源,确定所述第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输。
  36. 如权利要求33所述的方法,其特征在于,
    若所述第二PUSCH对应所述第一SRS资源,所述第一SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联。
  37. 如权利要求36所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据第二信息确定第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输,包括:
    根据所述第一TCI状态和所述第一SRS资源,确定所述第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输。
  38. 如权利要求33所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1=1且所述第二PUSCH对应所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源的情况下,所述根据第二信息确定第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输,包括:
    根据所述第一SRS资源,以及所述K1=1个TCI状态,确定所述第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输;或者,
    根据所述第二SRS资源,以及所述K1=1个TCI状态,确定所述第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输。
  39. 如权利要求1至28中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    接收第二DCI,其中,所述第二DCI用于激活第三PUSCH,所述第三PUSCH为CG类型2的PUSCH,所述第三PUSCH对应第三SRS资源和/或第四SRS资源,所述第三SRS资源为所述两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,所述第四SRS资源为所述两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源;
    根据第三信息确定所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输;
    其中,所述第三信息为以下至少之一:所述第三SRS资源关联的TCI状态,所述第四SRS资源关联的TCI状态,所述第三SRS资源,所述第四SRS资源。
  40. 如权利要求39所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,和/或,所述第四SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定。
  41. 如权利要求40所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源。
  42. 如权利要求40所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第一取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第二取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第四SRS资源;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第三取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,其中,所述第三SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,所述第四SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第四取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,其中,所述第三SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定,所述第四SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定。
  43. 如权利要求40所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第一取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第二取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第四SRS资源;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第三取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,其中,所述第三SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,所述第四SRS资源由所述第二DCI 中的第二SRS资源指示域确定;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第四取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,其中,所述第三SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,所述第四SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定。
  44. 如权利要求39至43中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    若所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,所述第三SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第四SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;或者,
    若所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,所述第三SRS资源属于所述第一SRS资源集合,所述第四SRS资源属于所述第二SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则所述第三SRS资源与所述第一TCI状态关联,所述第四SRS资源与所述第二TCI状态关联;或者,
    若所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,所述第三SRS资源属于所述第二SRS资源集合,所述第四SRS资源属于所述第一SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则所述第三SRS资源与所述第二TCI状态关联,所述第四SRS资源与所述第一TCI状态关联。
  45. 如权利要求44所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据第三信息确定所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输,包括:
    根据所述第一TCI状态、所述第三SRS资源、所述第二TCI状态和所述第四SRS资源,确定所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输。
  46. 如权利要求39至43中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    若所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源,所述第三SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联。
  47. 如权利要求46所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据第三信息确定所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输,包括:
    根据所述第一TCI状态和所述第三SRS资源,确定所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输。
  48. 如权利要求39至43中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在K1=1且所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源的情况下,所述根据第三信息确定所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输,包括:
    根据所述第三SRS资源,以及所述K1=1个TCI状态,确定所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输;或者,
    根据所述第四SRS资源,以及所述K1=1个TCI状态,确定所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输。
  49. 如权利要求1至48中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    发送第一终端能力信息;
    其中,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z1为正整数,且Z1>1。
  50. 如权利要求49所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第一终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
    频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
  51. 如权利要求49或50所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第一终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
  52. 如权利要求1至48中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    发送第二终端能力信息;
    其中,所述第二终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备支持CG PUSCH。
  53. 如权利要求52所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第二终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
    频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
  54. 如权利要求52或53所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第二终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
  55. 如权利要求52至54中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第二终端能力信息与第一终端能力信息通过同一信令传输,或者,所述第二终端能力信息与第一终端能力信息通过不同的信令传输;
    其中,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z1为正整数,且Z1>1。
  56. 如权利要求1至48中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    发送第三终端能力信息;
    其中,所述第三终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备支持Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第三终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第三终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z2为正整数,且Z2>1。
  57. 如权利要求56所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
    频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
  58. 如权利要求56或57所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
  59. 如权利要求1至58中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中指示了跟踪统一的TCI状态,所述第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中指示了跟踪统一的TCI状态。
  60. 如权利要求1至59中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为联合TCI状态,或者,所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为上行TCI状态。
  61. 一种无线通信的方法,其特征在于,应用于网络设备,所述方法包括:
    发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一探测参考信号SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合的用途均为用于基于码本或非码本的物理上行共享信道PUSCH;
    其中,所述第一SRS资源集合与K1个传输配置指示TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,所述第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;或者,所述第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;
    其中,所述K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前激活的TCI状态,K1为正整数。
  62. 如权利要求61所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1>1的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;和/或,
    在所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且所述K1个TCI状态仅包括第一TCI状态的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合均与所述第一TCI状态关联;或者,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述第一TCI状态关联,且所述第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态。
  63. 如权利要求61所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1 >1的情况下,所述两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的一个TCI状态关联,所述两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的另一个TCI状态关联;和/或,
    在所述两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且K1=1的情况下,所述两个SRS资源均与所述K1个TCI状态中的一个TCI状态关联;或者,所述两个SRS资源的一个SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,且所述两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源未关联TCI状态。
  64. 如权利要求62所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1>1的情况下,所述第一TCI状态基于所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态标识确定,和/或,所述第二TCI状态基于所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态标识确定。
  65. 如权利要求64所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,和/或,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
    所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,和/或,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
  66. 如权利要求62所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1>1的情况下,所述第一TCI状态基于所述K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置信息确定,和/或,所述第二TCI状态基于所述K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置信息确定;
    其中,所述第二指示信息为所述网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且所述第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括所述K1个TCI状态。
  67. 如权利要求66所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,和/或,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;或者,
    所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态,和/或,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态。
  68. 如权利要求62所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1>1的情况下,所述第一TCI状态由所述网络设备通过第三指示信息指示,和/或,所述第二TCI状态由所述网络设备通过第四指示信息指示。
  69. 如权利要求68所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,或者,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,或者,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,或者,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;
    其中,所述第二指示信息为所述网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且所述第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括所述K1个TCI状态。
  70. 如权利要求68所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态,或者,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态,或者,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠前的TCI状态,或者,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态在第二指示信息中位置最靠后的TCI状态;
    其中,所述第二指示信息为所述网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且所述第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括所述K1个TCI状态。
  71. 如权利要求68所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在终端设备未获取到所述第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备未配置所述第三指示信息的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在所述终端设备获取到所述第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备配置了所述第三指示信息的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
    在终端设备未获取到所述第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备未配置所述第三指示信息的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在所述终端设备获取到所述第三指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备配置了所述第三指示信息的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
  72. 如权利要求68所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在终端设备未获取到所述第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备未配置所述第四指示信息的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在所述终端设备获取到所述第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备配置了所述第四指示信息的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
    在终端设备未获取到所述第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备未配置所述第四指示信息的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在所述终端设备获取到所述第四指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述网络设备配置了所述第四指示信息的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
  73. 如权利要求68所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第三指示信息为第一取值的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在所述第三指示信息为第二取值的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
    在所述第三指示信息为第一取值的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在所述第三指示信息为第二取值的情况下,所述第一TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
  74. 如权利要求68所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态;和/或,在所述第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;或者,
    在所述第四指示信息为第一取值的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最大的TCI状态;和/或,在所述第四指示信息为第二取值的情况下,所述第二TCI状态为所述K1个TCI状态中标识最小的TCI状态。
  75. 如权利要求68至74中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三指示信息包含在所述第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中,和/或,所述第四指示信息包含在所述第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中。
  76. 如权利要求75所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含所述第三指示信息的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中不包含跟随统一TCI状态的SRS followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,所述第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含去使能的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS;和/或,
    在所述第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含所述第四指示信息的情况下,所述第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中不包含followUnifiedTCIstateSRS,或者,所述第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中包含去使能的followUnifiedTCIstateSRS。
  77. 如权利要求62、64至76中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1>1的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第一TCI状态确定,和/或,所述第二SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第二TCI状态确定;和/或,
    在K1>1的情况下,与所述第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第一TCI状态和/或所述第一SRS资源集合确定,和/或,与所述第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第二TCI状态和/或所述第二SRS资源集合确定。
  78. 如权利要求62、64至76中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1=1的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于所述第一TCI状态确定;或者,所述第一SRS资源集合对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第一TCI状态确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑所述第二SRS资源集合;
    和/或,
    在K1=1的情况下,与所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系均基于所述第一TCI状态和/或所述第一SRS资源集合确定,和/或,与所述第一SRS资源集合关联的PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第一TCI状态和所述第一SRS资源集合确定,且当前的PUSCH传输不考虑所述第二SRS资源集合。
  79. 如权利要求61至78中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述K1个TCI状态属于N个TCI状态;
    其中,所述N个TCI状态中的至少部分TCI状态为上行传输对应的激活的TCI状态,所述N个TCI状态由网络设备配置或指示,N为正整数,且K1≤N。
  80. 如权利要求79所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述K1个TCI状态由网络设备通过第五指示信息指示。
  81. 如权利要求80所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述K1个TCI状态为按照第一顺序依次从所述N个TCI状态选取的K1个TCI状态。
  82. 如权利要求81所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一顺序为TCI状态标识从小到大的顺序,或者,所述第一顺序为TCI状态标识从大到小的顺序。
  83. 如权利要求80所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第五指示信息用于指示所述K1个TCI状态为按照所述N个TCI状态在第二指示信息中的位置顺序依次选取的K1个TCI状态;
    其中,所述第二指示信息为网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且所述第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括所述N个TCI状态。
  84. 如权利要求83所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述N个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中的位置顺序为从前到后的顺序,或者,所述N个TCI状态在所述第二指示信息中的位置顺序为从后到前的顺序。
  85. 如权利要求80至84中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第五指示信息通过以下之一承载:无线资源控制RRC信令,媒体接入控制层控制单元MACCE信令,下行控制信息DCI信令。
  86. 如权利要求79至85中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述N个TCI状态由所述网络设备通过第六指示信息指示;或者,
    所述N个TCI状态由所述网络设备通过第二指示信息指示;或者,
    所述N个TCI状态为基于第二指示信息从所述网络设备通过第六指示信息指示的TCI状态中确定的;
    其中,所述第二指示信息为所述网络设备发送的至少用于指示或激活TCI状态的指示信息,且所述第二指示信息指示或激活的TCI状态至少包括所述N个TCI状态。
  87. 如权利要求86所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第六指示信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令,DCI信令。
  88. 如权利要求66、67、69、70、83、84、86或87所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第二指示信息通过第一MAC CE信令承载;
    其中,所述第一MAC CE信令还包括以下至少之一:服务小区指示信息,下行带宽部分BWP指示信息,上行BWP指示信息,一个或多个TCI数量指示域,一个或多个TCI类型指示域,一个或多个TCI状态指示域。
  89. 如权利要求61至88中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    发送第一DCI,其中,所述第一DCI用于调度第一PUSCH;
    其中,所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于第一信息确定;或者,所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第一PUSCH的传输基于第一信息确定;
    其中,所述第一信息为以下至少之一:所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态,所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态,所述第一SRS资源集合,所述第二SRS资源集合;
    其中,在K1>1的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述第二TCI状态关联;
    其中,在K1=1,且所述K1个TCI状态仅包括第一TCI状态的情况下,所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合均与所述第一TCI状态关联;或者,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述第一TCI状态关联,且所述第二SRS资源集合未关联TCI状态。
  90. 如权利要求89所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1>1,且所述第一DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第一TCI状态和所述第二TCI状态中预设的TCI状态确定;或者,
    在K1>1,且所述第一DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系基于所述第一TCI状态和所述第二TCI状态中所述网络设备指示的TCI状态确定。
  91. 如权利要求89所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1>1,且所述第一DCI为DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2的情况下,所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第一PUSCH的传输基于所述第一TCI状态、所述第一 SRS资源集合、所述第二TCI状态和所述第二SRS资源集合确定。
  92. 如权利要求89所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1=1的情况下,所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第一PUSCH的传输基于所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第一TCI状态确定;或者,
    在K1=1的情况下,所述第一PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第一PUSCH的传输基于所述第二SRS资源集合和所述第一TCI状态确定。
  93. 如权利要求61至88中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输基于第二信息确定;
    其中,所述第二PUSCH为配置授权CG类型1的PUSCH,所述第二PUSCH对应第一SRS资源和/或第二SRS资源,所述第一SRS资源为所述两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,所述第二SRS资源为所述两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源;
    其中,所述第二信息为以下至少之一:所述第一SRS资源关联的TCI状态,所述第二SRS资源关联的TCI状态,所述第一SRS资源,所述第二SRS资源。
  94. 如权利要求93所述的方法,其特征在于,
    若所述第二PUSCH对应所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源,所述第一SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;或者,
    若所述第二PUSCH对应所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源,所述第一SRS资源属于所述第一SRS资源集合,所述第二SRS资源属于所述第二SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则所述第一SRS资源与所述第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源与所述第二TCI状态关联;或者,
    若所述第二PUSCH对应所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源,所述第一SRS资源属于所述第二SRS资源集合,所述第二SRS资源属于所述第一SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则所述第一SRS资源与所述第二TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源与所述第一TCI状态关联。
  95. 如权利要求94所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输基于所述第一TCI状态、所述第一SRS资源、所述第二TCI状态和所述第二SRS资源确定。
  96. 如权利要求93所述的方法,其特征在于,
    若所述第二PUSCH对应所述第一SRS资源,所述第一SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联。
  97. 如权利要求96所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输基于所述第一TCI状态和所述第一SRS资源确定。
  98. 如权利要求93所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1=1且所述第二PUSCH对应所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源的情况下,所述第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输基于所述第一SRS资源和所述K1=1个TCI状态确定;或者,
    在K1=1且所述第二PUSCH对应所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源的情况下,所述第二PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第二PUSCH的传输基于所述第二SRS资源和所述K1=1个TCI状态确定。
  99. 如权利要求61至88中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    发送第二DCI,其中,所述第二DCI用于激活第三PUSCH,所述第三PUSCH为CG类型2的PUSCH,所述第三PUSCH对应第三SRS资源和/或第四SRS资源,所述第三SRS资源为所述两个SRS资源中的一个SRS资源,所述第四SRS资源为所述两个SRS资源中的另一个SRS资源;
    其中,所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输基于第三信息确定;
    其中,所述第三信息为以下至少之一:所述第三SRS资源关联的TCI状态,所述第四SRS资源关联的TCI状态,所述第三SRS资源,所述第四SRS资源。
  100. 如权利要求99所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,和/或,所述第四SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定。
  101. 如权利要求100所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_0的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源。
  102. 如权利要求100所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第一取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第二取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第四SRS资源;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第三取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,其中,所述第三SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,所述第四SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第四取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,其中,所述第三SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定,所述第四SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定。
  103. 如权利要求100所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第一取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第二取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第四SRS资源;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第三取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,其中,所述第三SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,所述第四SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定;或者,
    在所述第二DCI为DCI格式0_1或者DCI格式0_2,且所述第二DCI中的SRS资源集合指示域指示第四取值的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,其中,所述第三SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第一SRS资源指示域确定,所述第四SRS资源由所述第二DCI中的第二SRS资源指示域确定。
  104. 如权利要求99至103中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    若所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,所述第三SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第四SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联;或者,
    若所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,所述第三SRS资源属于所述第一SRS资源集合,所述第四SRS资源属于所述第二SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则所述第三SRS资源与所述第一TCI状态关联,所述第四SRS资源与所述第二TCI状态关联;或者,
    若所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源,所述第三SRS资源属于所述第二SRS资源集合,所述第四SRS资源属于所述第一SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联,所述第二SRS资源集合与所述K1个TCI状态中的第二TCI状态关联,则所述第三SRS资源与所述第二TCI状态关联,所述第四SRS资源与所述第一TCI状态关联。
  105. 如权利要求104所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输基于所述第一TCI状态、所述第三SRS资源、所述第二TCI状态和所述第四SRS资源确定。
  106. 如权利要求99至103中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    若所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源,所述第三SRS资源与所述K1个TCI状态中的第一TCI状态关联。
  107. 如权利要求106所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输基于所述第一TCI状态和所述第三SRS资源确定。
  108. 如权利要求99至103中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    在K1=1且所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输基于所述第三SRS资源和所述K1=1个TCI状态确定;或者,
    在K1=1且所述第三PUSCH对应所述第三SRS资源和所述第四SRS资源的情况下,所述第三PUSCH对应的上行发送空间滤波器或空间关系以及所述第三PUSCH的传输基于所述第四SRS资源和所述K1=1个TCI状态确定。
  109. 如权利要求61至108中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    接收第一终端能力信息;
    其中,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示终端设备支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z1为正整数,且Z1>1。
  110. 如权利要求109所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第一终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
    频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
  111. 如权利要求109或110所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第一终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
  112. 如权利要求61至108中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    接收第二终端能力信息;
    其中,所述第二终端能力信息用于指示终端设备支持CG PUSCH。
  113. 如权利要求112所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第二终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
    频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
  114. 如权利要求112或113所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第二终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
  115. 如权利要求112至114中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第二终端能力信息与第一终端能力信息通过同一信令传输,或者,所述第二终端能力信息与第一终端能力信息通过不同的信令传输;
    其中,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第一终端能力信息用于指示所述终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z1个统一的TCI状态用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z1为正整数,且Z1>1。
  116. 如权利要求61至108中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    接收第三终端能力信息;
    其中,所述第三终端能力信息用于指示终端设备支持Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第三终端能力信息用于指示终端设备支持DCI中传输配置指示域的一个码点最多激活或指示Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,或者,所述第三终端能力信息用于指示终端设备在CG PUSCH上支持Z2个统一的TCI状态同时用于上行传输或上行重复传输,其中,Z2为正整数,且Z2>1。
  117. 如权利要求116所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三终端能力信息按照以下粒度中的至少之一上报:
    频段粒度,频段组合粒度,频段组合中的频段粒度,频段组合中的每个频段上的载波粒度,频段范围粒度,终端粒度。
  118. 如权利要求116或117所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第三终端能力信息通过以下之一承载:RRC信令,MAC CE信令。
  119. 如权利要求61至118中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,
    所述第一SRS资源集合的配置信息中指示了跟踪统一的TCI状态,所述第二SRS资源集合的配置信息中指示了跟踪统一的TCI状态。
  120. 如权利要求61至119中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为联合TCI状态,或者,所述K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态为上行TCI状态。
  121. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括:
    通信单元,用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一探测参考信号SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合的用途均为用于基于码本或非码本的物理上行共享信道PUSCH;
    其中,所述第一SRS资源集合与K1个传输配置指示TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,所述第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;或者,所述第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;
    其中,所述K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前激活的TCI状态,K1为正整数。
  122. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:
    通信单元,用于发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一探测参考信号SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合,所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合的用途均为用于基于码本或非码本的物理上行共享信道PUSCH;
    其中,所述第一SRS资源集合与K1个传输配置指示TCI状态中的TCI状态关联,和/或,所述第二SRS资源集合与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;或者,所述第一指示信息指示的两个SRS资源中的部分或全部SRS资源与K1个TCI状态中的TCI状态关联;
    其中,所述K1个TCI状态为上行传输对应的当前激活的TCI状态,K1为正整数。
  123. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括:处理器和存储器,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,使得所述终端设备执行如权利要求1至60中任一项所述的方法。
  124. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:处理器和存储器,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,使得所述网络设备执行如权利要求61至120中任一项所述的方法。
  125. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求1至60中任一项所述的方法。
  126. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求61至120中任一项所述的方法。
  127. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被执行时,如权利要求1至60中任一项所述的方法被实现。
  128. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被执行时,如权利要求61至120中任一项所述的方法被实现。
  129. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,包括计算机程序指令,当所述计算机程序指令被执行时,如权利要求1至60中任一项所述的方法被实现。
  130. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,包括计算机程序指令,当所述计算机程序指令被执行时,如权利要求61至120中任一项所述的方法被实现。
  131. 一种计算机程序,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序被执行时,如权利要求1至60中任一项所述的方法被实现。
  132. 一种计算机程序,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序被执行时,如权利要求61至120中任一项所述的方法被实现。
PCT/CN2022/110843 2022-08-08 2022-08-08 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备 WO2024031237A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2022/110843 WO2024031237A1 (zh) 2022-08-08 2022-08-08 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2022/110843 WO2024031237A1 (zh) 2022-08-08 2022-08-08 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024031237A1 true WO2024031237A1 (zh) 2024-02-15

Family

ID=89850183

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/110843 WO2024031237A1 (zh) 2022-08-08 2022-08-08 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024031237A1 (zh)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110868231A (zh) * 2018-08-10 2020-03-06 华为技术有限公司 管理天线面板的方法、网络设备和终端设备
US20210050972A1 (en) * 2018-02-15 2021-02-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for activating or deactivating semi-persistent configuration for channel state indicator resource sets
WO2021062761A1 (zh) * 2019-09-30 2021-04-08 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 确定空间域发送滤波器的方法及装置
WO2021184383A1 (zh) * 2020-03-20 2021-09-23 华为技术有限公司 通信方法、装置、系统及存储介质
CN114846761A (zh) * 2020-01-15 2022-08-02 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 用于物理上行链路共享信道传输的方法、终端设备和网络设备

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210050972A1 (en) * 2018-02-15 2021-02-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for activating or deactivating semi-persistent configuration for channel state indicator resource sets
CN110868231A (zh) * 2018-08-10 2020-03-06 华为技术有限公司 管理天线面板的方法、网络设备和终端设备
WO2021062761A1 (zh) * 2019-09-30 2021-04-08 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 确定空间域发送滤波器的方法及装置
CN114846761A (zh) * 2020-01-15 2022-08-02 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 用于物理上行链路共享信道传输的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2021184383A1 (zh) * 2020-03-20 2021-09-23 华为技术有限公司 通信方法、装置、系统及存储介质

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2018141272A1 (zh) 终端、网络设备和通信方法
US20230232415A1 (en) Method and apparatus for uplink transmission and reception in wireless communication system
US11864206B2 (en) Method and device for transmitting/receiving downlink channel from multiple transmission/reception points in wireless communication system
CN113490278B (zh) 下行信号传输的方法和设备
US20230063901A1 (en) Sidelink feedback method and terminal device
US11737131B2 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving channel state information in wireless communication system
US20240244449A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
US20240023076A1 (en) Method for channel estimation, terminal device, and network device
WO2023206102A1 (zh) 传输方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2023035144A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2022016342A1 (zh) 信道加扰方法和终端设备
WO2024031237A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2022036523A1 (zh) 数据传输的方法及设备
WO2024026678A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2024031357A1 (zh) 通信方法、装置、设备、存储介质、芯片、产品及程序
WO2023108638A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2023102848A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法和终端设备
WO2024011553A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2024026839A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法和终端设备
WO2023279399A1 (zh) 侧行传输资源的确定方法、发送方法、装置、设备及介质
WO2023141824A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法和终端设备
WO2022077346A1 (zh) 信道传输的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2023123399A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2024007336A1 (zh) 信息处理方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2023201643A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22954217

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1